You are on page 1of 267

Communications Test Set 3500 / 3500A

Operation Manual
Issue-2

EXPORT CONTROL WARNING: This document contains controlled technology or technical data under the jurisdiction of the Export Administration Regulations (EAR), 15 CFR 730-774. It cannot be transferred to any foreign third party without the specific prior approval of the U.S. Department of Commerce, Bureau of Industry and Security (BIS). Violations of these regulations are punishable by fine, imprisonment, or both.

OPERATION MANUAL

COMMUNICATIONS TEST SET 3500 / 3500A

PUBLISHED BY Aeroflex

COPYRIGHT © Aeroflex 2010 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise without the prior permission of the publisher. Reissued Issue-2 Jan 2010 Apr 2010

10200 West York / Wichita, Kansas 67215 U.S.A. / (316) 522-4981 / FAX (316) 524-2623

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

Electromagnetic Compatibility: For continued EMC compliance, all external cables must be shielded and three meters or less in length.

Nomenclature Statement: In this manual, 3500 / 3500A, Test Set or Unit refers to the 3500 / 3500A Communications Test Set.

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

T H I S P A G E I N T E N T I ON A L L Y L E F T B L A N K .

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

SAFETY FIRST: TO ALL OPERATIONS PERSO NNEL
REFER ALL SERVICING OF UNIT TO QUALIFIED TECHNICAL PERSONNEL. THIS UNIT CONTAINS NO OPERATOR SERVICEABLE PARTS. WARNING: USING THIS EQUIPMENT IN A MANNER NOT SPECIFIED BY THE ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION MAY IMPAIR THE SAFETY PROTECTION PROVIDED BY THE EQUIPMENT. CASE, COVER OR PANEL REMOVAL Opening the Case Assembly exposes the operator to electrical hazards that can result in electrical shock or equipment damage. Do not operate this Test Set with the Case Assembly open. SAFETY IDENTIFICATION IN TECHNICAL MANUAL This manual uses the following terms to draw attention to possible safety hazards, that may exist when operating or servicing this equipment. CAUTION: THIS TERM IDENTIFIES CONDITIONS OR ACTIVITIES THAT, IF IGNORED, CAN RESULT IN EQUIPMENT OR PROPERTY DAMAGE (E.G., FIRE).

WARNING: THIS TERM IDENTIFIES CONDITIONS OR ACTIVITIES THAT, IF IGNORED, CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH. SAFETY SYMBOLS IN MANUALS AND ON UNITS CAUTION: Refer to accompanying documents. (This symbol refers to specific CAUTIONS represented on the unit and clarified in the text.) AC OR DC TERMINAL: Terminal that may supply or be supplied with AC or DC voltage. DC TERMINAL: Terminal that may supply or be supplied with DC voltage. AC TERMINAL: Terminal that may supply or be supplied with AC or alternating voltage.

EQUIPMENT GROUNDING PRECAUTION Improper grounding of equipment can result in electrical shock. USE OF PROBES Check the specifications for the maximum voltage, current and power ratings of any connector on the Test Set before connecting it with a probe from a terminal device. Be sure the terminal device performs within these specifications before using it for measurement, to prevent electrical shock or damage to the equipment. POWER CORDS Power cords must not be frayed, broken nor expose bare wiring when operating this equipment. USE RECOMMENDED FUSES ONLY Use only fuses specifically recommended for the equipment at the specified current and voltage ratings. INTERNAL BATTERY This unit contains a Lithium Ion Battery, serviceable only by a qualified technician. CAUTION: SIGNAL GENERATORS CAN BE A SOURCE OF ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMI) TO COMMUNICATION RECEIVERS. SOME TRANSMITTED SIGNALS CAN CAUSE DISRUPTION AND INTERFERENCE TO COMMUNICATION SERVICES OUT TO A DISTANCE OF SEVERAL MILES. USERS OF THIS EQUIPMENT SHOULD SCRUTINIZE ANY OPERATION THAT RESULTS IN RADIATION OF A SIGNAL (DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY) AND SHOULD TAKE NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS TO AVOID POTENTIAL COMMUNICATION INTERFERENCE PROBLEMS.

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

T H I S P A G E I N T E N T I ON A L L Y L E F T B L A N K . see Cover Page for details. Subject to Export Control. .

Subject to Export Control.DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY The Declaration of Conformity Certificate included with the Unit should remain with the Unit. . Aeroflex recommends the operator reproduce a copy of the Declaration of Conformity Certificate to be stored with the Operation Manual for future reference. see Cover Page for details.

see Cover Page for details. Subject to Export Control.T H I S P A G E I N T E N T I ON A L L Y L E F T B L A N K . .

CHAPTER 3 . Subject to Export Control. ORGANIZATION The Manual is composed of the following Chapters: CHAPTER 1 . Principles of Operation are also included. Troubleshooting. It is strongly recommended that the Operator be thoroughly familiar with this manual before attempting to operate the equipment.INTRODUCTION Provides an Introduction and a Brief Overview of Functions and Features. Maintenance and Storage Procedures. Provides Applications. CHAPTER 4 .PREFACE SCO PE This Manual contains Instructions for operating the 3500 / 3500A. Identifies and explains all Operation Screens and Menus. Provides a Turn-On Procedure and Initial Adjustments. CHAPTER 2 . see Cover Page for details.OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Identifies and functionally describes all Controls.OPERATOR MAINTENANCE Identifies and explains Routine Service. i . Indicators and Connectors.OPTIONS Identifies and explains the Options available for the 3500 / 3500A.

................................ Scope ...................................................................................... Self Test Screen ..................................... Recall Configuration Screen ............................................................................. Principles of Operation ........ Audio Function Generator Test Screen ........................................ Nomenclature Cross-Reference List ................. Equipment Capabilities and Features ................................. Routine Checks .................... General ............................ Annunciator Setup Screen .......................................................................... Calibration Screen ........... Duplex Test Screen ..................................... Preventive Maintenance Procedures............................... Equipment Data ....................................................................................... Receiver Test Screen ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ RF Power Meter Screen ......................................................................................................................................... Distortion Meter Screen ............ RF Error Meter Screen ......................................................................................... 2-1 2-5 2-6 2-8 2-9 2-18 2-26 2-31 2-40 2-44 2-45 2-47 2-49 2-51 2-53 2-54 2-55 2-58 2-59 2-60 2-61 2-66 2-67 2-68 2-70 2-71 2-72 2-73 2-74 2-75 2-76 2-77 2-79 2-81 2-83 2-85 2-85 2-86 2-87 2-87 2-87 2-87 2-87 2-87 ii Subject to Export Control................................................................. HW Config Setup Screen ................................... Capabilities ...........................................................................................................................OPERATING INST RUCTIONS 2-1 2-2 2-2-1 2-2-2 2-2-2A 2-2-2B 2-2-2C 2-2-2D 2-2-2E 2-2-3 2-2-3A 2-2-3B 2-2-3C 2-2-3D 2-2-4 2-2-4A 2-2-4B 2-2-4C 2-2-5 2-2-5A 2-2-5B 2-2-5C 2-2-5D 2-2-5E 2-2-5F 2-2-5G 2-2-5H 2-2-6 2-2-6A 2-2-6B 2-2-6C 2-2-6D 2-2-6E 2-2-6F 2-2-6G 2-2-7 2-2-7A 2-2-7B 2-3 2-3-1 2-3-2 2-3-2A 2-3-2B 2-3-2C Operator’s Controls......................... Other Functions .................................. Features ...... Diagnostic Screen ..................................................................... Date / Time Screen ..................................... see Cover Page for details.............................. Utilities Menu ..................................................................................................................................................................................... Indicators and Connectors ............................................................................................................................................................TABLE OF CONTENTS PARAGRAPH PAGE CHAPTER 1 ................ ......................... Save Configuration Screen ........................... Other Meters / Functions .......................................................................................... Modulation Meter Screen .......... Tools........................................................................................ Function Generator ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Meters Menu ............................................................................ 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-2 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-15 CHAPTER 2 .......................................................................................................................... Remote Setup Screen .................................................. Schedule of Checks ............. ANT-Cable Test Screen .......... Materials and Equipment Required ..................... Screen Icons .......................................................................................... AF Counter Screen.......... RSSI Meter Screen ................... Options Screen ................................................... SINAD Meter Screen ..........................................................................................INTRODUCTION 1-1 1-1A 1-1B 1-2 1-2A 1-2B 1-3 1-4 General Information...................................... Version Screen ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Transmitter Test Screen ....... Unit Copy Screen ................................................................................................................................................................................... USB Manager Screen ........................................................................................................................................ DTMF Decode Meter ................................................................................................................................................... Audio Level Meter Screen ................ Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services .................................................... Operation Screens and Menu Configurations ................................... DCS Decode Meter ................................................................................................................................................................................. Self Test Menu ................................ System Menu ...

........................................................................................................................................................................................................ Tracking Generator Option (35000070) .... Scripts Screen Features and Functions ................................................................................................ Turn-On Procedure......................................................................... iii ................................................................ Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................... Checking Unpacked Equipment ........................................OPTIONS 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-3-1 4-3-2 4-4 4-4-1 4-4-2 4-5 4-5-1 4-5-2 4-6 4-6-1 4-6-2 4-7 4-7-1 4-7-2 4-7-3 4-7-4 4-7-5 4-7-6 General .................................................. Spectrum Analyzer Option (35000010) ..... Oscilloscope Screen Features and Functions ............................................... Battery Replacement ..................................................................................................... Tracking Generator Screen Features and Functions ................................................. P25 Mini-Meter ...................... Environment ........................................................................................................................................................... Fuse Replacement ................. Oscilloscope Option (35000001) ...................................... Scripting Flowcharts .............................................................. Transfer Scripts to the 3500 / 3500A ...................... Battery Recharging ................ Maintenance Procedures ........................... 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-7 3-7 3-8 3-11 3-14 3-16 3-17 3-17 3-17 CHAPTER 4 ........................................ Measuring Reverse Power ...........................MAINTENANCE 3-1 3-1-1 3-1-1A 3-1-1B 3-1-2 3-2 3-3 3-3-1 3-3-2 3-3-3 3-3-4 3-3-5 3-4 3-4A 3-4B Service Upon Receipt ...................................................... Unpacking ........... Screen Warnings and Cautions ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Scripting Option (35000060) ........................................................................... Preliminary Servicing and Adjustment of Equipment ...OPERATING INST RUCTIONS (cont) 2-4 2-4-1 2-4-2 2-5 2-5-1 2-5-2 2-5-3 2-5-4 2-5-5 2-5-6 2-5-7 Operation Under Usual Conditions ............................................................. Service Upon Receipt of Material .... Spectrum Analyzer Screen Features and Functions ....... General Scripting Commands .... Introduction ................................................................................... Installing Options .................................................................. Handle Replacement ............................................................................................ Tracking Generator Screen ............... Spectrum Analyzer Screen .................................................................................................................................................... Advanced Vehicle Installation Testing ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-15 4-15 4-16 4-23 4-23 4-24 4-31 4-31 4-32 4-33 4-33 4-34 4-35 4-37 4-38 4-39 Subject to Export Control......................................................................................... Operating Procedures .................... 2-88 2-88 2-90 2-91 2-91 2-92 2-96 2-97 2-102 2-108 2-112 CHAPTER 3 .................................................................. Preparation for Storage or Shipment ..................... P25 Option (35000100) .................................................. Measuring DTF (Distance to Fault) ...... Typical Vehicle Installation Test ........ P25 Mini-Meter Features and Functions ...................................................................................................... Measuring SWR ........... Oscilloscope Screen ................................................................. Copy Scripts with Unit Copy Screen ................................................................................................................................................. Loading Software using USB Memory Device ........................... Bumper Replacement.......... Scripts Screen .................................................. Packaging ........................................... see Cover Page for details..........................................................................................................................................................................................PARAGRAPH PAGE CHAPTER 2 .................................................................................................................

....... see Cover Page for details.............................................................................................................. Abbreviations ............................ A-1 A-1 A-3 A-5 B-1 C-1 INDEX iv Subject to Export Control................................ Remote Operation .................................................................................................................. I/O Connectors .................... ...........................................................PARAGRAPH PAGE APPENDICES A A-1 A-2 A-3 B C Connector Pin-Out Tables .................................................. REMOTE Connector Pin-Out Table ..................................... AUDIO Connector Pin-Out Table ...........

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS / TABLES LIST OF ILLUST RATIONS TITLE Controls. see Cover Page for details. Connectors and Indicators Comm Breakout Box Connectors Menu / Screen Hierarchy PAGE 2-1 2-4 2-5 LIST O F TABLES TITLE 3500 I/O Connectors 3500A I/O Connectors 3500 AUDIO Connector Pin-Out Table 3500A AUDIO Connector Pin-Out Table 3500 REMOTE Connector Pin-Out Table 3500A REMOTE Connector Pin-Out Table PAGE A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 A-6 Subject to Export Control. v .

clean and dry surface. Avoid damaging the carton and packing material during equipment unpacking. and lift the equipment and packing material vertically and place the 3500 / 3500A transit case and end cap packing on a suitable flat. ● Ch eckin g Un p acked Eq u ip men t ● ● Inspect the equipment for damage incurred during shipment. Report all discrepancies to Aeroflex. while restraining the shipping carton. report the damage to Aeroflex. Store the shipping carton for future use should the 3500 /3500A need to be returned. If the equipment has been damaged. Place protective plastic bag and end cap packing material inside shipping carton. Check the equipment against the packing slip to see if the shipment is complete. Grasp the 3500 / 3500A transit case firmly. Remove the protective plastic bag from the 3500 / 3500A transit case. Use the following steps for unpacking the 3500 / 3500A.SERVICE UPON RECEIPT OF MATERIAL Unpacking Special-design packing material inside this shipping carton provides maximum protection for the 3500 / 3500A. vi Subject to Export Control. see Cover Page for details. . ● ● Cut and remove the sealing tape on the carton top and open the carton.

see Cover Page for details. Soft-Sided Carrying Case. 32 Vdc. Accessory Case. Accessory Case. Soft-Sided Carrying Comm Breakout Box External DC Power Supply Fuse. Operation/ICW (CD) Power Cable (AC) Power Cable (DC Cigarette Lighter) Short-Open-Load VSWR Calibrator (TNC) USB Flash Drive (1 GB) 23758 (2200-0410-700) 9149 (1201-7617-001) 9145 (1201-7616-801) 9147 (1201-7616-901) 9143 (1201-7616-001) 62368 (6041-4284-400) 62398 (6041-5680-800) 5763 (1000-6200-800) 5762 (1000-6200-700) 10191 (1412-0006-006) 10192 (1412-0006-007) 64598 (7005-6242-900) 67374 (7110-6200-200) 56080 (5106-0000-057) 64592 (7005-6240-200) 62403 (6041-6280-000) 64606 (7005-6244-700) 6107 (1002-6200-8P0) 6105 (1002-6200-2C0) 62302 (6041-0001-000) 62404 (6041-6281-400) 38245 (2901-0000-054) 67327 (7110-1100-600) PART NUMBER QTY 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MODEL 3500 ONLY 3500A ONLY 3500 / 3500A 3500A ONLY 3500A ONLY 3500A ONLY 3500A ONLY 3500 / 3500A 3500 / 3500A 3500 ONLY 3500A ONLY 3500 ONLY 3500A ONLY 3500 / 3500A 3500 / 3500A 3500 / 3500A 3500 ONLY 3500 ONLY 3500A ONLY 3500 / 3500A 3500 / 3500A 3500 / 3500A 3500 / 3500A 3500 / 3500A 3500A ONLY Subject to Export Control. Spare (5 A. Getting Started (Paper) Manual. Type F) Handset Handset Cable Handset Manual. vii .Ch eckin g Un p acked Eq u ip men t ( co nt ) STANDARD ITEMS DESCRIPTION 3500 Communications Test Set 3500A Communications Test Set Adapter (BNC-F to TNC-M) Antenna (BNC) (50 MHz) Antenna (BNC) (150 MHz) Antenna (BNC) (450 MHz) Antenna (BNC) (800 MHz) Cable (BNC) (M-M) (48 in) Cable (TNC) (M-M) (48 in) Case.

see Cover Page for details.Ch eckin g Un p acked Eq u ip men t ( co nt ) STANDARD ITEMS Adapter (BNC-F to TNC-M) (23758) (2200-0410-700) Antenna (BNC) (50 MHz) (9149) (1201-7617-001) Antenna (BNC) (150 MHz) (9145) (1201-7616-801) Antenna (BNC) (450 MHz) (9147) (1201-7616-901) Antenna (BNC) (800 MHz) (9143) (1201-7616-001) BNC Cable (M-M) (48 in) (62368) (6041-4284-400) TNC Cable (M-M) (48 in) (62398) (6041-5680-800) Accessory Case (3500) (5763) (1000-6200-800) viii Subject to Export Control. .

see Cover Page for details. ix .Ch eckin g Un p acked Eq u ip men t ( co nt ) STANDARD ITEMS Accessory Case (3500A) (5762) (1000-6200-700) Soft-Sided Carrying Case (10191) (1412-0006-006) Soft-Sided Carrying Case (10192) (1412-0006-007) Comm Breakout Box (64598) (7005-6242-900) External DC Power Supply (67374) (7110-6200-200) Spare Fuse (5 A. 32 Vdc. Type F) (56080) (5106-0000-057) Handset (3500) (64592) (7005-6240-200) Handset Cable (3500) (62403) (6041-6280-000) Subject to Export Control.

Ch eckin g Un p acked Eq u ip men t ( co nt ) STANDARD ITEMS Handset (3500A) (64606) (7005-6244-700) Getting Started Manual (6107) (1002-6200-8P0) Operation / ICW Manual (6105) (1002-6200-2C0) AC Power Cable (62302) (6041-0001-000) Power Cable (DC Cigarette Lighter) (62404) (6041-6281-400) VSWR Calibrator (TNC) (38245) (2901-0000-054) USB Flash Drive (1 GB) (67327) (7110-1100-600) x Subject to Export Control. . see Cover Page for details.

Transit Desk Top Stand Directional Coupler (20 to 200 MHz) Directional Coupler (20 to 200 MHz) Attenuator (10 dB) Adapter (N-M to BNC-F) Cable (BNC) (M-M) (16 in) Flip Cover Maintenance Manual (CD) Tripod Tripod and Stand with Dolly Tripod Tripod Stand Dolly PART NUMBER 9149 (1201-7617-001) 9145 (1201-7616-801) 9147 (1201-7616-901) 9143 (1201-7616-001) 82559 (AC27002) 38240 (2901-0000-049) 23770 (2200-0412-800) 23766 (2200-0412-400) 82560 (AC27003) 38242 (2901-0000-051) 23770 (2200-0412-800) 20327 (2113-0000-004) 67076 (7020-0012-500) 10242 (1412-6200-500) 63656 (6500-5681-000) 47290 38255 20327 62405 63964 (AC27013) (4100-0900-000) (2901-0401-010) (2113-0000-004) (6041-6282-000) QTY 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3500 / 3500A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 3500 / 3500A 3500 / 3500A 3500 / 3500A 3500 / 3500A 3500 / 3500A 3500 / 3500A 3500 / 3500A 3500 / 3500A MODEL 3500 ONLY 3500 ONLY 3500 ONLY 3500 ONLY 3500 / 3500A 63966 (7001-6242-100) 6108 (1002-6201-4C0) 67474 (7112-8102-500) 82553 67474 (7112-8102-500) 63659 (6500-5881-100) 6361 (1005-1000-000) Subject to Export Control. see Cover Page for details.Ch eckin g Un p acked Eq u ip men t ( co nt ) OPTIONAL ITEMS (These optional items may be included if ordered) DESCRIPTION Antenna (BNC) (50 MHz) Antenna (BNC) (150 MHz) Antenna (BNC) (450 MHz) Antenna (BNC) (800 MHz) Attenuator (20 dB / 50 W) Attenuator (20 dB / 50 W) Adapter (N-F to BNC-F) Adapter (N-M to TNC-M) Attenuator (20 dB / 150 W) Attenuator (20 dB / 150 W) Adapter (N-F to BNC-F) Adapter (N-M to BNC-F) Battery. xi . Spare Case.

see Cover Page for details. .Ch eckin g Un p acked Eq u ip men t ( co nt ) OPTIONAL ITEMS Antenna (BNC) (50 MHz) (9149) (1201-7617-001) Antenna (BNC) (150 MHz) (9145) (1201-7616-801) Antenna (BNC) (450 MHz) (9147) (1201-7616-901) Antenna (BNC) (800 MHz) (9143) (1201-7616-001) 20 dB / 50 W Attenuator (38240) (2901-0000-049) 20 dB / 150 W Attenuator (38242) (2901-0000-051) Adapter (N-M to TNC-M) (23766) (2200-0412-400) Adapter (N-M to BNC-F) (20327) (2113-0000-004) Adapter (N-F to BNC-F) (23770) (2200-0412-800) Spare Battery (67076) (7020-0012-500) xii Subject to Export Control.

Ch eckin g Un p acked Eq u ip men t ( co nt ) OPTIONAL ITEMS Transit Case (10242) (1412-6200-500) Directional Coupler (47290) (4100-0900-000) 10 dB Attenuator (38255) (2901-0401-010) 10 dB Attenuator (38255) (2901-0401-010) BNC Cable (M-M) (16 in) (62405) (6041-6282-000) Desk Top Stand (63656) (6500-6242-100) Flip Cover (63966) (7001-6242-100) Maintenance Manual (6108) (1002-6201-4C0) Subject to Export Control. xiii . see Cover Page for details.

.Ch eckin g Un p acked Eq u ip men t ( co nt ) OPTIONAL ITEMS Tripod (67474) (7112-8102-500) Tripod / Stand / Dolly (67474) (7112-8102-500) / (63659) (6500-5881-100) / (6361) (1005-1000-000) xiv Subject to Export Control. see Cover Page for details.

Equipment Name and Model Number: Purpose of Equipment: B. GENERAL INFORMATION Scope Type of Manual: Operation Manual 3500 / 3500A Communications Test Set The 3500 / 3500A Communications Test Set is used for testing radios and related equipment. A. Nomenclature Cross.INTRODUCTION 1-1. 1-1 . see Cover Page for details.CHAPTER 1 .Reference List COMMON NAME 3500 / 3500A Test Set or Unit OFFICIAL NOMENCLATURE 3500 / 3500A Communications Test Set 3500 / 3500A Communications Test Set Subject to Export Control.

FM. AM.1-2. Simple operation with few key strokes and textual displays. as well as fault finding for antennas. VSWR measurements. FM. RF Generator Testing .Up to 1 GHz bandwidth. Self Test and Diagnostics for internal validation and testing. The 3500 / 3500A is capable of measuring high power. power amplifiers and interconnects. RF Power Meter . as well as commercial radio applications. . AM. frequency and level measurements. A. 1-2 Subject to Export Control. For DC input. Power is derived from an internal battery. up to 200 W. reliability and long service life. The 3500 / 3500A and supplied accessories are stored in a Soft Carrying Case or a Transit Case.Up to 1 GHz bandwidth. The 3500 / 3500A may also be used for bench testing in the General Communications environment. the DC IN Connector is provided for battery charging. Automatic power shutdown after approximately 5 to 20 minutes (selectable) of non-use when AC power is not connected. see Cover Page for details. Internal Battery allows 6 hours intermittent use. Capabilities Capabilities           RF Receiver Testing . 1 kHz / 150 Hz and external modulation sources. bench operation or servicing.20 W intermittent duty cycle. Compact and lightweight enough to allow for one person operation. Large LCD Display with user adjustable Backlight and Contrast. portability. 200 W with an external attenuator. The 3500 / 3500A is designed for ease of use. The 3500 / 3500A meets the needs of a variety of vehicular radios. EQUIPMENT CAPABILITIES AND FEATURES The 3500 / 3500A is a Handheld Communications Test Set for Radio installation testing. 5 hours continuous use before recharge.

1-3 . see Cover Page for details. F eat u res Features  System Menu       Duplex Test Screen Receiver Test Screen Transmitter Test Screen ANT-Cable Test Screen Audio Function Generator Test Screen Meters Menu     SINAD Meter Screen Distortion Meter Screen AF Counter Screen Audio Level Meter Screen  Self Test Menu    Self Test Screen Diagnostic Screen Calibration Screen  Utilities Menu         Annunciator Screen Remote Screen Version Screen Date/Time Screen HW Config Screen Options Screen USB Manager Screen Unit Copy Screen Optional Features      Spectrum Analyzer Screen Oscilloscope Screen Tracking Generator P25 Test Scripting Subject to Export Control.B.

.. ......... .. ..... ... . . .......... .. . ... . . . ..... .. ........... . ...... ......Same as Timebase R e s o l u t i o n : ....... . .. . . . .. ... . Specifications are subject to change without notice.. .. ..... ... .... .. ..... . . . ... .. . .... ........ . ...... 1 t o 0 ..... 1 d B / 0 .......... 7 μV Level Accuracy: ..... .. .... .. ..... .... .. .... .... ...... .. .. ... .... ..... . . ... ....25 : 1 SWR Connector: ..... .... ... ............... RF GENERATOR PORT INPUT PROTECTION ANT Port: ... . +44 dBm (Thermal alarm) FREQUENCY Range: .. the specified resolution takes precedence. . ...... .......... . .. . Received (input) signal modulation bandwidth does not exceed selected receiver IF bandwidth.... ................... ........... ...5 : 1 T/R Connector: .... . ..... ........... ..... ....... ......... .............. . 2 μV A N T C o n n e c t o r ( d B m / μV ) : ...... ....... .... . ... .... . ..... ..... 1 μV S W R C o n n e c t o r ( d B m / μV ) : ........... <60 Hz in 300 Hz to 3 kHz BW RESIDUAL AM: ....... ... ... ................. .. ............. .. ....... .......... .... . ... .. ........ ............. EQUIPMENT DATA NOTE • • • • • • Where specified resolution exceeds specified accuracy.. . . .. ....... ................ ... .... .... ........... .... ...... . .............. . ...... .... ............ . ... .... .. .. ... .....1 2 0 d B m / 7 0 7 ........... . .. . ..... .. 1 μV ( 1 d B S t e p S i z e ) CONNECTOR VSWR ANT Connector: .................. .. .. ... . ..... 1 Hz OUTPUT LEVEL RANGE (TNC FEMALE) T / R C o n n e c t o r ( d B m / μV ) : .... . ............... ... .5 0 t o .... . 2 to 1000 MHz Accuracy: ... .. ...... ... ............ ............ ..... .....5 : 1 SSB PHASE NOISE: ...... ...... . .... .... .. 3 t o 1 2 5 .. . ....... ...... ....... .... ........... ....... ...... . .. All RF characteristics are referenced to 50 Ω.... ..... .. .... . ... ... ......... .. .. . .... .. .................... -40 dBc (>±20 kHz Offset from Carrier) in Band (2 MHz to 1 GHz) RESIDUAL FM: ....... ........1-3.. .. ....... ..6 5 d B m / 1 2 5 7 4 3 . -80 dBc/Hz at 20 kHz offset SPURIOUS Harmonics: .. .... .. ..... ....... .. ........ . ..... see Cover Page for details. ... . . .. ... ... ...... ..... ...... ....... . ........... . ..... ... .... . .. .... -30 dBc Non-Harmonics: .. ........ ..... ......... .. .. ... ...5 t o .. <5% in 300 Hz to 3 kHz BW 1-4 Subject to Export Control....... ..... ... .. .. . .. +20 dBm T/R Port: ..... ......... <1.. ... .. ... .... .............. .......... ........... .. ........ ........... . .......... ........... .... ......... .... ..... . ........... . ...... ................. ..... .. ... .. .. . .................... . ............. ........... . .. ±2 dB ±3 dB (<-100 dBm) L e v e l R e s o l u t i o n : .... ..... .... ....... .................. .. . . .... .. ... .... .... ...... +20 dBm SWR Port:.. Allow warm-up period of at least 5 minutes..... ... ......... .. . ........ ..... ... . ..... . 1 t o 7 . <1. ......... ...... ...... ... ...... .. .... . ... .....9 0 d B m / 7 0 7 1 .... Accuracy and resolution stated in percentages are referenced to the measured or selected value.. .. . .. ....... ... ... ... .....3 0 t o .. ..... . ..... .. ........ .... . .... .... ...... ...... ............. ... ..... ... ....... .. . . . ...... . ............. . . <1...... .... ...

.... 1 kHz / 35 mVrms nominal (High Z Load) FM Input Slope: . ..1-3.... .. ....... .... . ............... .... ........................................................................... ...........AM and FM ......... ........ . ...... ............... ............ .... ................ DTMF FM Deviation Range: . ...... ............ ................ .... .......... 150 Hz to 5 kHz rate) MIC IN (3500): Microphone Input: .................... ..... Off................. . . ....... ...... .... ................ ..... ...................... ...... ........ ...... EQUIPMENT DATA (cont) RF GENERATOR MODULATION ....1 Hz Accuracy: ................ ... High Z (3500) 150 Ω.................... 1-5 . ..........AM and FM: Range: ... ........ 0 Hz to 20 kHz Resolution: ................ ........ .. .... ............ .... see Cover Page for details....... . .... . . . 150 Ω...... 10 Hz FM Deviation Accuracy: ........FM Modulation Frequency (Rate) ....................... .... . ............. .. ... . ........ 300 Hz to 3 kHz BPF) FM Deviation Resolution:............ ....2 kHz) ±30% (>1........................... . ..... .......... ........... ........ ........................ . ..... ...................... ............. . .... . ........ ...................... ............... .............. ........... ......... 0 H z t o 8 0 k H z FM Modulation Accuracy: .................. . ... 2 t o 1 5 m V r ms ( 8 m V r m s n o m i n a l ) ( R a n g e 1 ) 35 to 350 mVrms (100 mVrms nominal) (Range 2) 2 to 32 mVrms (20 mVrms nominal) (Range 3) FM Input Frequency Range: .05 to 3 Vrms FM Input Frequency Range: . ±20% (300 Hz to 1... 0 Hz to 100 kHz (AFGEN1 and AFGEN2 selectable) Total Harmonic Distortion: .... ........... ............................ ............. ................ .... 300 Hz to 3 kHz F M D e v i a t i o n : .2 kHz) FM Input Slope: .... .... >2 kHz Deviation.... .................... .... .... 3% (1000 Hz Rate................... ........ . Of f ..................... ........... .. .............. Positive voltage yields positive deviation Ext AUDIN Input: Switchable Loads: .......... Timebase ±2 Hz Modulation Waveforms ...... 400 Hz to 1.. Sine... 1 KΩ.. .. .......... ..... 1 to 30 mVrms FM Input Frequency Range: .. ..... Positive voltage yields positive deviation Subject to Export Control. 0........... 600 Ω... ..... 600 Ω.... .. ...... ...... .... . . ........ .............. . ......... ............... ................ ................... ............. ........ ... ..2 kHz FM Input Slope: ... . . ±10% (2 to 50 kHz deviation........................... ...................... ......................... 300 Hz to 5 kHz FM Input Level Sensitivity: ...... ....... ..... ....... ... High Z (3500A) Input Levels: ......... .. ..... ..0.. .............. .. .. Positive voltage yields positive deviation MIC IN (3500A): M i c r o p h o n e I n p u t : ........... DCS.

. ...... ....2 kHz) ±30% (>1.. ..... ......... .............. .. ..... ..... .... 0 % t o 1 0 0 % ( AF G E N 1 a n d A F G E N 2 s e l e c t a b l e ) Resolution: .. ....... .......1-3....... .......05 to 3 Vrms AM Input Frequency Range: . ........ . . . .... .2 kHz) 1-6 Subject to Export Control........... .... .... . . ...... 1 KΩ. .... . ...... .... 10% to 90% Modulation Total Harmonic Distortion: ... .................. EQUIPMENT DATA (cont) RF GENERATOR MODULATION .. ...... ..... .... . ......... 0 H z t o 8 0 k H z AM Modulation Accuracy: . .... .. ............... . .. O F F ....... . .. ..... ........... ........ .............. 300 Hz to 3 kHz A M M o d u l a t i o n : .. ......... 600 Ω. ........... .............AM Modulation Frequency (Rate) .. . .. 3% (20% to 90% mod.. ............ . ..... ........ .. 300 Hz to 3 kHz BPF) Ext AUDIN Input: Switchable Loads: . 150 Ω............... ... High Z (3500) 150 Ω...... ............. .......... Of f .. ... . ..1% Accuracy: .. ........... . .. ... .. Timebase ±2 Hz AM Modulation: R a n g e : ..... ..... .. ... . ... ............... ........ ... ...... . ..... ..1% / 35 mVrms nominal (High Z Load) MIC IN (3500): AM Input Frequency Range: ....... .. ... ... ... . .. .. ... ... . ........... ............ 0 Hz to 20 kHz Resolution: ............... 400 Hz to 1....... 0.......... .... ..... ........... .. . . .......... ....... .... .... .. . ... ............ ..................... . .. ....... ±20% (300 Hz to 1. . .................... .. ............0...... ...... ... ... . .... 0............. . .............. ....... .. ............ .... .. .... .....2 kHz MIC IN (3500A): M i c r o p h o n e I n p u t : ............ . High Z (3500A) Input Levels: . ... . .... 10% of setting.. ................................. ..... . ...1 Hz Accuracy: ........................ ..... . ........... .... ....... ......... ........ ..... . . .... ... see Cover Page for details.. .. ........... . ...... ....... . .....AM and FM: Range: ...... ...... ............... ..... .................. 300 Hz to 5 kHz AM Input Level Sensitivity: ... .. . ... 2 t o 1 5 m V r ms ( 8 m V r m s n o m i n a l ) ( R a n g e 1 ) 35 to 350 mVrms (100 mVrms nominal) (Range 2) 2 to 32 mVrms (20 mVrms nominal) (Range 3) AM Input Frequency Range: . .................. ............... .. ............. ........... .... ... 150 Hz to 5 kHz rate... 1000 Hz rate....... 600 Ω........ . . . .

...2 kHz Input Level: .................................................................................................. 600 Ω Audio Level Out: ...... PTT ON: ....................................................................... 0............................................................................................ Timebase ±2 Hz Output Level: Load Impedance: .................. they are summed together................................... Specifications are for each FGEN individually...........01 Vrms Accuracy: .................................. 0... GND PTT OFF:..................... 300 Hz to 1.................. AFGEN1 and AFGEN2 may be routed to the external AUD Out connection on the handset........................ see Cover Page for details......... 1-7 .................................................................±10% Distortion: ..................03 to 8 Vrms PTT OPERATION NOTE PTT ON / OFF changes between TRANSMITTER TEST and RECEIVER TEST.................. High....... Open with Pullup Subject to Export Control......................... <3% (1 kHz rate................... 30 Hz to 5 kHz 0 to 20 kHz (operational) Frequency Resolution: .................................................................................. 0....................................................................................... 0 to 1..................................................1-3..............................57 Vrms Resolution: .1 Hz Frequency Accuracy:......................................................................... Frequency Range: ........................................ sine 300 Hz to 3 kHz) HANDSET (PROVIDED) OR H-250 HANDSET WITH ADAPTER Frequency: ............................................................................................................ EQUIPMENT DATA (cont) AUDIO GENERATORS (AFGEN1 AND AFGEN2) NOTE If two sources are selected... Low...................................................................

. ...... . Scale 0 to 100 LO Emissions: ...... Modulation........ ... FM Demod Output (AUD OUT): IF BW:....... ... .................... ............. ............... . ... ..... .. .............. ... .... . quieted by ≤30 dB 1-8 Subject to Export Control. ... . ...... ..5 m........ .. 100 and 300 kHz IF BW Audio Filters BW: ........ .. +20 dBm for 10 seconds... Alarm sounds T/R Connector: .......... ....... .... ...... ...... .... -60 to -10 dBm (RF Error. ... -20 dBm (RF Error............. .... ... AF Counter) -50 dBm (RSSI) Maximum Input Level: ANT Connector: .. 10.. . ..... ... .. . .. ....... . ....... . ... ........... 1 0 d B S I N A D .... . . . 10 frequencies allowed between 2 and 999........... ...... .. . .... ... ... . . NONE....... T i m e b a se RESOLUTION: . ..... ...... 2 to 1000 MHz A C C U R A C Y : .... ................. ....... ...... CCITT BP......... ....... 300 Hz LP.... 300 Hz to 20 kHz BP and 3 kHz LP Level Sensitivity: . .............. ..4 0 d B m t y p i c a l ........ CCITT BP...................... ... .... C-Wt BP... 4 μV ( . ... . 30.... . Distortion.. +37 dBm (AM) +43 dBm (FM) NOTE Overtemp Alarm trips if the power is left on too long and the temperature of the Power Termination gets too hot.... 6.. . EQUIPMENT DATA (cont) RF RECEIVER FREQUENCY RANGE: ..5.25...... ........ .......... ......1 1 0 d B m w i t h P r e a m p ) T / R C o n n e c t o r : ..... 300 Hz to 20 kHz BP and 3 kHz LP Level Sensitivity: ...... .. . ......33.........5... ... . .... ..... . ....... . 25 and 30 kHz Audio Filters BW: .... .. . . >-50 dBc Quieted Channels: . ............... . . ...... ...... see Cover Page for details.... ...... 6.... . 2 2 3 6 μV Useable Input Level Range (Receiver Measurements): ANT Connector: ...... .............. NONE......... .. Modulation....... .. . . ......... ... ........ . 300 Hz LP. ... ..... 600 to 1800 Hz........ ........... .. . 5 kHz LP..25... .... ...... .. ...................... .... ............. . . 75 dBa minimum at 0.... .. .. . .. ..... .. 300 Hz to 5 kHz BP......... 7 mVrms / %AM ±15% Speaker Output: ............ ... 300 Hz HP... . ........ . . 5......... .... . ...... Level Range.... . ... . ..... ....... .....33. 12.. maximum volume Volume Control: .. ...1-3...... . . 25..... ... ... .. ..... Distortion. 12.... ....... .. ........ . .... .. .............. 300 Hz HP.. ..... .. .... ....... . . . .... ..... ......999 MHz. .... .8 0 d B m t y p i c a l ... 8. ......... . ... 1 0 d B S I N A D / 2 2 ......... . .......... . ........ 300 Hz to 3 kHz BP.. ...(3 Vrms/kHz Dev) / IF BW (kHz) ±15% AM Demod Output (AUD OUT): IF BW:. .. ..... ......... ................. . . 300 Hz to 5 kHz BP.... .......... . ...... ........ 5. . AF Counter) -80 to -10 dBm with Preamp ON -90 to -10 dBm (RSSI) -110 to -10 dBm with Preamp ON Minimum Input Level (Receiver Measurements) T/R Connector: .. 1 Hz INPUT AMPLITUDE Minimum Input Level (Audio Sensitivity): A N T C o n n e c t o r : ..... 15 kHz LP. .......... .......................... . 10.. . C-Wt BP.... 300 Hz to 3 kHz BP. ... ... 8.. 15 kHz LP.......... .... 5 kHz LP..........

............... see Cover Page for details... ... ....... 0 t o +4 3 d B m ( 0 t o 2 0 W ) 0 to +53 dBm (0 to 200 W) (Ext Atten set to 20 dB) Minimum Input Level (w/ dBm): .. ..... ......... .............. .......... ...... ... .. .......... 1 Hz Accuracy: .... .... .......... ... .. ........... . + 4 4 d B m f o r 5 s e co n d s O N ...... .... ................. .. ... . .. ........................ ..... W or dBm (selectable) Resolution: .. . .. ...... .............. ........................ ... .. .... . ...... .. ..... ................ ......... ......... ....... .... .. .......... ... .. . . ..... ...... DUPLEX EQUIPMENT DATA (cont) NOTE Duplex Test is Receiver and Transmitter Tests simultaneously.. ..... . .. ... . .......... ........ .. .... ... . .. ... .... . .... ........ ................... ........ ... . . ............... .. ... ........ 0..... ..... ... .............. . ................ . . ..... ..... .. RF TRANSMITTER TEST METERS RF ERROR METER Meter Operating Range: ...01 dBm Accuracy: ............... ..... ........... ..... .. ....... ..... . ... ... ... ..... ..... ............ .......... .... ...... ... ....... ....... . ............. Subject to Export Control...... . .. . .. . .....Timebase ±2 Hz RSSI METER (RF Power within Receiver IF BW) Display Range / Units: .. .... .... .......... .... .... .... .... ....... ..... .. ............ . . ... .. .... ..... .... .. ........ ........ ................ ...... .. . ..... . ........ .......... .. ........ .. .. ........ ..... . ... .. ........ .... . -120 to +43 dBm (10 pW to 20 W) -120 to +53 dBm (10 pW to 200 W) (Ext Atten set to 20 dB) Useable Meter Reading .... .. . . ...... ....... ....... ±200 kHz R e s o l u t i o n : .... .... ........ . ... 0........... .................... ..... ................ ... ........... ... ........ . .. .... .. .. ....... .. .. .... .. ... ... .. . ........ . .... ......... ..... .. ........ ...... ... ..01 (W).. ... . ....... +43 dBm / 20 W for 10 minutes at +25°C or until Thermal Alarm sounds (whichever occurs first) A l a r m s : ...... .. .. . .............. ......... .... ................ -50 to +43 dBm Resolution: . .... ..... -90 to -10 dBm -110 to -10 dBm (Preamp ON) T/R Connector: .. . .10 W / +20 dBm Maximum Input Level: ................... ..... .... ........ .. ...... ....... ....... 20 dB is added to the measurements of 50 or 200 W. . ... 0...... ±3 dB RF POWER METER (Broadband RF Power into T/R Connector) D i s p l a y R a n g e / U n i t s : . ... .. ... . .... . ..... ±1 dB ± external attenuator accuracy NOTE When External Attenuator is selected....... 1-9 ......... .... ±1 dB for internal attenuator With External Attenuator: . ............. .1-3.. .1 (dBm) Accuracy No External Attenuator: ... . ....... .. . Performance parameters are the same as the independent Receiver and Transmitter Test Screens. .RF Level Range: ANT Connector: ............ Average Power Display Units: ............. ............ ....... ...... .. 5 m i n u t e s O F F or until Thermal Alarm sounds (whichever occurs first) Meter Modes: ... ..... . . ......... ........ 0... ..

......................... ............. .... ...... ...... .. ....... .... ....... .... ......... ...... . . . .. .. ±10% of SWR readings (calibrated) <300 MHz ±20% of SWR readings (calibrated) >300 MHz DTF READING Test Range: . ... .. .......... . ... ..... . .. .. ... . .. ....... ... .... .. ........ .. ... ...... . ........... ±3 ft 1-10 Subject to Export Control.... ... .. 2 to 1000 MHz Calibration and Sweep Bandwidth: ..... .............. ..150 W average for temperatures up to 25°C. .... .... .... 1% Accuracy: ....... .... ..... ............... ........... ....... ...75 dB 150 W Attenuator: ...... ....... ±0......... .. ...... ........ .. .20 dB: ... . 40 to 400 ft (Range is function of Frequency Span and Cable Velocity Factor and Cable Loss) Accuracy: ........ .. . ..... 30% to 90% modulation..... .. ... .. . ±10% (500 Hz to 100 kHz Deviation) ±5% (1 to 10 kHz Deviation) 150 Hz and 1 kHz Rate AM MODULATION METER Meter Range: .. .. .... .... .. .... .. ......... .. .......... . .... ....... . .. ...... .. . .. .. ..... ..... ... ......... ...... ..... ........ .. ...... ............................. ... .... .... horizontal 200 W peak for 30 seconds ON/ 5 minutes OFF at 25°C FM DEVIATION METER Meter Deviation Range: ... ... . ..........1-3...... ........... ... ... .. ... ......... . ..... . .... ..... . 01 Accuracy: ...... ....... ........ .... . .. ..................00 R e s o l u t i o n : ... .. EQUIPMENT DATA (cont) RF POWER METER (Broadband RF Power into T/R Connector) (cont) External 20 dB Attenuator Accuracy 50 W Attenuator: ..... .. ....... 0....... .. . Peak+... ...... ....... .. ........ ........ .. . ........ ....... .... .... .. .. ...... ........ .. .. .... .. .. . .. .. . . ...............500 Hz to ±100 kHz Meter Modes: .. .... 50 W average at 25°C 150 W Attenuator . 1..... .... . ....... ......... ...... 2 to 1000 MHz.... ... ........ ............. . . ... .. ... . ..20 dB: .. . .. .............. ....... ..... linearly de-rated to 125 W at 55°C. .. .... ...... . ...... ..... . ±5% of reading...... ........ ..50 dB External 20 dB Attenuator Power Rating: 50 W Attenuator .... ......... .... .... .... .. ........... ....... . .. ........ ... . ..... ........ ... ... .. ......... ........ 1 Hz Accuracy: ... 3 kHz LPF SWR MEASUREMENT FREQUENCY Range: ... .. .... . . ... .. Peak+................ .... .. ............ ....... ... . .. ..... . ... ... ....... .. ..... . .. ....... (Peak-Peak)/2 R e s o l u t i o n : . ... . ...... ............. .. . .......... . ....... ......... .. . ... .. . . ............. ..... ... .. .. . ... .... see Cover Page for details.. .....1 MHz Resolution SWR READING Display Range: . ..... .......... .. (Peak-Peak)/2 R e s o l u t i o n : ........ . ..... ............... . .... 0 .. . .............. . .. 3 to 328 ft (1 to 100 m) Display Range: ...... ....... Peak-............. ...... .. .. ..... .... ... .. . .. . .. .... . ............... .. . . ..... .... .......... ....... . ..... .... ..... ........ ......... ... .5% to 100% Meter Modes: ..00 to 7...... .. . . ... ..... Peak-. ..... ..... .. ... .. ......... .. ......... .. ......... ........... .. .. . ... ... ........ .... .......... ... .. .. ... ... .. .............. ........ .... .. ...... ±0..... ... 1 kHz rate........... .... .. . ..... ..... . .. . .. .. .... .. ... ..... ........

.... .... ....... ..... ................... . reading >1%............. ...... ......... .... ........... .............. ........... .. ..... ....................... ................ ......... .............. .... .. ...................... ................... ... .... EXT AUD IN. ... ....................... ... ........ .............................. ±1........ ......... ... .... see Cover Page for details... ........... ....... ...................... .. . ...........1 dB Accuracy: ............ ......... .. .. reading >8 dB........... ............. ......... ...... ..... 1 V r m s t o 3 0 V r m s (÷ 2 0 ) D i s p l a y U n i t R e s o l u t i o n : .............. .......... .......... ............ ...... ................ . ... .....1 Hz Accuracy: ...........................EXT AUD IN.............. ............5 Vrms Resolution: ... . ....... 10 mVrms to 1........... 0. DEMOD Audio Frequency Notch: ........... .. ........... ....... ............................. .... .............2 to 5 Vp-p SINAD METER Measurement Sources: .................. ......... ........................ 0 0 1 d B μV ... 0 ......................... ....... 0... ....... ..................... ............... .. ............. 0 0 1 m V . 1 V r m s t o 3 0 V r m s (÷ 1 0 ) D V M ( 3 5 0 0 ) : ................ 1 0 m V r m s t o 3 V r m s ( x 1 ) ......... 1-11 ............ 0 0 1 V ..... . ....... .. ........ . ....... ... . .................................. ....... EXT AUD IN.......... ................... 10 mVrms to 1.... ..5 Vrms E X T A U D I N ( 3 5 0 0 A ) : .... 0 to 40 dB Resolution: ... . . .......... ........... .................. ....0% to 100% Resolution: ........... 100 Hz to 10 kHz (IF BW set appropriately for received modulation BW) Baseband Audio In: ........ ..... ....... ... ....... ........... ...... .. .............. .... .. .... ±1 Count AF COUNTER Input Dynamic Range: F M : ..... . ...... ...... ............... ................ ...... .......... 10 mVp-p to 5 Vp-p Audio Input Range: .. .... .............. ..... 1 V r m s t o 3 0 V r m s (÷ 2 0 ) D V M ( 3 5 0 0 A ) : ... . ................ ....... .... ..... <40 dB............ ....... ... .. ... . ............................. ................... .................. . 0. .. ±1 Count DISTORTION METER Measurement Sources: ............1-3........... .....5 mVrms Input Level (3500A): .. 1 5 H z t o 2 0 k H z ( I F B W s e t a p p ro p r i a t e l y f o r r e c e i v e d m o d u l a t i o n B W ) AM: ... ........................ ....... . ....................... ....... .... .. ........1% Accuracy: .. ...... ... ............... ......... 1 kHz Reading Range:............... .. ... ... ............. 0 ........... ........ ......... ....... ±5% (EXT AUD IN) Subject to Export Control..... .. ±10%... ... . ... ........... 15 Hz to 20 kHz Ext Audio Input: ................... ........ . ....... .. ... ....... .......... .. 0 .. .......................... .... ........ 0 0 1 W Accuracy: ....... ... ......... 1 0 m V r m s t o 3 V r m s ( x 1 ) . . 300 Hz to 10 kHz (1 kHz for SINAD and Distortion Meters) Input Level (3500): . 200 Hz to <5 kHz Input Level: EXT AUD IN (3500): ... ... ±1 Hz AUDIO FREQUENCY LEVEL METER Measurement Sources: . ............5 dB......... ........ ....................... ... ...................... <20%........................ ............ ............................. 0 ..... ...... ..... .......... . ............ 0 ................ 0........ 1 kHz Reading Range:....................... ... ....... .... DVM Frequency Range: .. EQUIPMENT DATA (cont) AUDIO METERS AUDIO INPUT (EXT AUD IN) (BNC Input on Handset) EXT AUD IN Input : Frequency Range: ................ ... ............... . .... . .... DEMOD Audio Frequency Notch: ... . .. ....... ... ....... ............ ........ .............. .. ......... ...... 0 0 1 d B m ............................... ... .. 50 to 1....................

.......... ... .. .... .... 50%/Div Vertical Accuracy: . ... 0. . ..... . ... ... .. 1 KΩ......... ..... .... .... ... ....... .... . ... 5%...... ... ........... .. . ....... ... . High Z (3500) 150 Ω........ 5 s e q u e n c e W i n d o w s : ......... ... .............. ..... .. .. ... .. 2........ .... .. . 2 M Hz t o 1 G H z S p a n : . .. . 1 kHz to 5 MHz in a 1... . ...... ............... .. ...... % Modulation) Displays Delta in Time between Markers SPECTRUM ANALYZER (OPTIONAL) Frequency: R a n g e : ...... .. .. .. ... .......... ....... .. ........... . ... ...... ....... ..... ...... ... .... . ..... ............ ... ... . . . .........1-3.... ......... ........... . ......... . .. 5 s e q u e n c e AM Internal Demodulation: .. Audio In.... .... ... . .. ... .... ...... . 3% of Full Scale Trigger Source: . .... . . .. ... EQUIPMENT DATA (cont) OSCILLOSCOPE (OPTIONAL) Single Input Channels: .... . ........... .. . ............ . . .... ............. ...... ... . ... ..... ..... .. ... .... .. ...... .. .... ........ ............. ... 150 Ω...... ......... .. ......... . ........ ... ... . ...... .. 2 .. . ............... ... ........ ..... ... 10...... ..... . Variable on Vertical Scale Markers: ........ .. .............. ... ......... ........ ......5 sequence Marker Offset: ..... ............ ... ........ . .... .. .. . R e c t a n g l e Vertical Scale: . .......... .. ... ....... . . see Cover Page for details.. ....... ..5 ms/Div to 0. ......... ....................... ... ..... ....... .. ........... AC Range: D V M a n d A u d i o I / O O u t p u t : ............ .. High Z (3500A) Coupling: DVM Input: ...... .. ..... ... ... ....... .. ..... Divide-by-10..... ........ . Auto or Normal (Internal) Trigger Adjustment: .. ±3 dB Typical (30 dB Signal to Noise) 1-12 Subject to Export Control.... ....... ... ... . ..... ............ .... . .. ......... . . . ... . .. ... 1 0 m V / Di v t o 1 0 V / D i v i n a 1 .. . . ... AC FM Internal Demod: . .. ...... . . .. . .. ... ....... ... .. ................ .. ..... . . .. ... .... .. .. ... Ha n n i n g ...... . ........ .. . ....... ... ........... .. ... .. . ........5 Span in a 1. . ..... . .... ... .... .. .... ... .... .... .. ..... .. ... .. .... ....... ..... ...... . .. ... . . ..... ..... ...... .... . . ..... .... ... 20 dB/Div Marker Range: .. ..... ......... . ... 5 s e q u e n c e F M I n t e r n a l D e m o d u l a t i o n : .............. ....... .. . ...... .. ... ...... .... ..... . ..... ... ... .. .... .. . 2 ..... . .. ... . .. . ... . . ..... . ..... . .. F l a t T o p ... 0 ...... .. DC and GND Audio I/O Input: ...... . ......... ............ kHz.. 600 Ω. ... ... ............ . .. . .. .... .......... .... . . .... ±3 dB Typical (30 dB Signal to Noise) Noise Floor: ..... .... . .2. .. .. . ...... ... 10%....2... .... ... .. ........ ...... . .... .... 1 k Hz / D i v t o 5 0 k H z / D i v i n a 1 .. .. .......... ....... ................ ... .. ..... ... ..... ........ . . ....... ...... . ... . .... ... .. ...... ............ .. ....5 sequence Power Bandwidth Accuracy: .... .... ....... ... ....... . . . . ....... ... . ....... .... DC AC Internal Demod: ... . ... ...... .... ..... .. . ......... . AC.. ............. 600 Ω............ .... .. . .. .. ............... ... . .. .. .. ..........1 sec/Div Accuracy: ....... ........ 5...... ... 20%.. .... ........ ................... .... ..... .... . .. . .... 5 kHz Horizontal Sweep: Range: ...... DVM. . 2 . .. . ... .... ..... Internal Demod Input Impedance: D V M I n p u t : ... 1 MΩ Audio I/O Input: ... . .... ....................... .... .. 15.. .. ±1 kHz to 0... ..... .. ........ ....... ....... ......... 1 0 k Hz t o 5 M H z i n a 1 ...... .... 10% of Full Scale (DC to 5 kHz) Bandwidth: ..... Two Markers Displays Vertical Measurement (Voltage. ..

... C l a s s 2 BENCH HANDLING O p e r a t i o n : . ... ..8 in) (D) WEIGHT: ... ... .. . . .... .... . .. .. . .. ..... ....... .... .. . .. . . . . . ..... . .. 1-13 .. . .. . ... Class 2 O p e r a t i o n : ... . .... .. . 12 lbs with accessories and soft carrying case TEMPERATURE S t o r a g e : .... .. . 8.. 285 mm (11. ... . .... .... . ... ... . . .. .... . ... <10% of the nominal input voltage Transient Overvoltage: .. ... . see Cover Page for details.... ... . ..1 in) (W).. ..... . . .. . . . ... . ... Pollution Degree 2 EMC: . .. .. . ....... . . . . ... . .. ... . .. .. .. . ... . . .... . . . . ....... . .. 100 to 240 VAC. .. .. .. .. . ..... . . .. .. .. . . C l a s s 2 VIBRATION O p e r a t i o n : . .... . .. . .1-3.. . . . . . . .. . .2 in) (L).5 1° C t o + 7 1 ° C NOTE Battery must not be subjected to temperatures below -20°C. .. .... .. ....... . ..... . .5 ppm over temperature range Aging: ... .... . .. . .... . ... ..... .... .. . .. . . . ... . . .. . MIL-PRF-28800F.... . . M I L -P R F . .. ... . . .. .. .... .. . . .... ..... . . . C l a s s 2 COMPLIANCE USE: .. .. .... .. ... . . . ... ..... . .. . .. . . . .... . . . . . ......... .. . .. ... ... .2 8 8 0 0 F .. .. . ..... .... .... .. ... ... M I L -P R F .. ..... . . . M I L -P R F ... . . . ...... . . .. . ..1 ppm / year Warmup Time: . . ..... . . ... .. ...... ... .. ..... ... .. . .. . .. . . . ±0. ... . .... ... ... . . . . .. . ... . .. .. . .. . ...... . .... ....... . .. . ...2 8 8 0 0 F .. . .. . . . ..2 8 8 0 0 F . .. . ... . .... ... . ....... . . ......... . . . .. . . ..... .. .. . .... ... . .. . ........ . ..... .. . . . ..... .... . .. . ... .... . .... .. . .. ....... 1. ... .... ... ... . . 3 minutes ENVIRONMENTAL / PHYSICAL OVERALL DIMENSIONS: . .. ... .... . .. .. .. . ... . . .. ... . . . .. . . . . . .... O p e r a t i o n : ...... . . MIL-PRF-28800F. .2 0° C t o + 5 0 ° C NOTE Battery is to be charged at 0°C to +45°C. ..... .. ... . ...... . .... . . .. .... According to Installation Category II Subject to Export Control. ..... . . .... .. .. .. . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. . . ... .. .....25 ppm at 25°C ±0.. . .. . .... ...... .. . . ... .... . ... . C l a s s 2 ALTITUDE O p e r a t i o n : .... ... . .. . . . . . ....... . ...... .. ..... ......... C l a s s 2 SHOCK O p e r a t i o n : ... . .. ... . .. . . ... . .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . . . . . .. .. .... .. ..... . . .. . .. .. ... . .. .. ... .. . ... .... ...... .... . 231 mm (9. . .. .. 70 mm (2. ...... .... 47 Hz to 63 Hz AC Input Voltage Fluctuation: . .. ........ .... .. . .. . .... .. ....... . . .. .5 lbs........ .. .. . . . . . . ... .. .... ... . .. .... . .. . EQUIPMENT DATA (cont) TIMEBASE STANDARD OSCILLATOR Temperature Stability: . ... . . . .. ... .2 8 8 0 0 F . .. .... .. . ......... . ... .. ... ... . ... .. . . . ... . .. .. .. .. .. ... . . . . . . . ..2 8 8 0 0 F . . . .. . ... HUMIDITY Storage: . . . . ..... .. .... .. . . . . .. ...... ... .. .. . .. ... . . .. . .. ... .. .... ... .. . . . M I L -P R F . . . . . M I L -P R F ... . .. . ..... . . Class 2 AC INPUT POWER AC Input Voltage Range: ....... .. .... . . .. .. .... .. ........ . . . ..... . ....5 A maximum.. .. . ..... .. . .. . . .... . . ... ... ..... . .. .... ... . .. . ... . .... nor above +60°C. .. ... ..

... ..... ...... .. 55 W Nominal: ..... . STATIC THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS Ambient.. .... . ...... . ... .. .... ........ 32 Vdc... .. ... ..... ........ UL 1950. . EN55022 Class B........... ...... . . ........... ...... ....... Operation Time: .. .......... ... . . 234 and No... .. ... . . .. .... ...... . EQUIPMENT DATA (cont) AC-DC CONVERTER Usage Environment: . . . ... .. ... .. . ...... .... 11 to 32 Vdc DC Power Input: Maximum: . Type F BATTERY B a t t e r y T y p e : ............. ..... . .......... ........ .. Power ON... ............. ..... .. ........ ...... . . ... <15°C rise after 30 minutes Ambient.. . ......... ... ... ........ ...... ...................... . . ... .......... . . ..... ..... ..... ....... ....... .. <25°C rise after 30 minutes 1-14 Subject to Export Control. 4 hours NOTE Battery is to be charged at 0°C to +45°C.. ........... nor above +60°C....... . .......... ....... .... ... . ..... . 5 hours continuous use Charge Time: . IEC 950/EN 60950 DC INPUT CONNECTOR (DC IN) DC Input Voltage Range: . .... . ... .....2 0° C t o + 8 5 ° C EMI: . . ...... . . ....... . . ..... ...... ... ....... Power ON... ... . .. Dead Battery (<10% capacity) is to be charged for 20 minutes before operation on AC Power....... ..... . .... ....... .. ....... ... ... ...... . .. ........ ... . .. ....950.. .. .... ................ ........ .... . . .... CSA 22.. ... EN61000-3-2 Class D Safety: . ..... see Cover Page for details............... ......... ................. .. .. .... . ... . .... ... ...... ... ... .............. . ... .... 25 W DC Fuse Requirement: ....... ........ RF Power ON:...... .. . ........ .. .. 0° C t o + 4 0 ° C S t o r a g e T e m p e r a t u r e : .... ...... . ... ........ ... ... ............. .. ...... .... .. . .... ....... ... ....... ........ 5 A....... .... .. . ...... .......... L it h i u m I o n ( L i I o n ) B a t t e r y p a c k NOTE Battery must not be subjected to temperatures below -20°C...... Indoor use. . .. . RF Power OFF: .......... .. .... Pollution Degree 2 O p e r a t i n g T e m p e r a t u r e : .. .. ....... .. ..... ............. ... .. ........ ........... . .. .... .... ............ .. ..... .. .... .. .... . . ....... ... . ...... . .. .. ... . ..... . ..... .. . ... .. ... . ... . ... ...... ...2 No.......... . .............. ..... . .. .. ....... .... . ...1-3.

The Receive signals are down-converted to 13 MHz and demodulated to baseband signals. T h e Mu l t i . see Cover Page for details. F P G A a n d m e m o r y t o s e n d d a t a from the RF Digitizer PCB Assy through the Power PC to the ColdFire for display on the LCD Display.F u n c t i o n P C B A s s y i n c l u d e s t h e p r o c e s s o r s . The RF Digitizer PCB Assy converts the baseband signal to a modulated 10.1-4. The RF Converter PCB Assy converts the 10.5 MHz Tx IF which is upconverted in the RF Assy to provide an RF Generator output. The RF Converter PCB Assy also contains the VSWR coupler and associated circuitry and the Power Termination. 1-15 .5 MHz TX IF to the 2 MHz to 1 GHz RF and from the 2 MHz to 1 GHz receiver input to the 13 MHz RX IF. Keyboard inputs are processed to provide instructions to the RF Assy. Subject to Export Control. PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION The 3500 contains the following assemblies: LCD RF KEYPAD MULTIFUNCTION T/R SWR ANT AUDIO RF DIGITIZER REMOTE POWER SUPPLY DC IN BATTERY The Power Supply PCB Assy is responsible for supplying power to the internal modules for operation and for charging the internal batteries. LOs and digital circuitry necessary for software control and for tuning and level control. The RF Assy consists of the RF Controller PCB Assy and the RF Converter PCB Assy. The RF Controller PCB Assy provides the TCXO.

F P G A a n d m e m o r y t o s e n d d a t a from the RF Digitizer PCB Assy through the Power PC to the ColdFire for display on the LCD Display. .F u n c t i o n P C B A s s y i n c l u d e s t h e p r o c e s s o r s .1-4. The RF Controller PCB Assy provides the TCXO.5 MHz TX IF to the 2 MHz to 1 GHz RF and from the 2 MHz to 1 GHz receiver input to the 13 MHz RX IF. see Cover Page for details. 1-16 Subject to Export Control. The Receive signals are down-converted to 13 MHz and demodulated to baseband signals. The RF Converter PCB Assy converts the 10. The RF Converter PCB Assy also contains the VSWR coupler and associated circuitry and the Power Termination. The Audio I/O PCB Assy provides the DVM/Scope. The RF Assy consists of the RF Controller PCB Assy and the RF Converter PCB Assy. T h e Mu l t i . Keyboard inputs are processed to provide instructions to the RF Assy. PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION (cont) The 3500A contains the following assemblies: LCD RF DVM AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT AUDIO I/O MU L T I FUNCTION T/R SWR ANT KEYPAD AUDIO POWER SUPPLY RF DIGITIZER REMOTE DC IN BATTERY The Power Supply PCB Assy is responsible for supplying power to the internal modules for operation and for charging the internal batteries. The RF Digitizer PCB Assy converts the baseband signal to a modulated 10. LOs and digital circuitry necessary for software control and for tuning and level control.5 MHz Tx IF which is upconverted in the RF Assy to provide an RF Generator output. Audio In and Audio Out signals to the 3500A Front Panel.

INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS 1 2 3 4 5 6 (3500) (3500A) 3500 7 1 2 3 ANT Connector T/R Connector DC IN Connector AUDIO Connector SWR Connector REMOTE Connector Display (LCD) Multi-Function Soft Keys Number Keys CONTRAST / • Key BACKLIGHT / ± Key CHARGE Indicator POWER Key POWER Indicator FAULT Indicator  DOWN Key  LEFT Key  RIGHT Key  UP Key DVM Connector AUDIO IN Connector 062-006b 19 18 17 16 15 14 1 2 4 8 5 6 7 3 4 9 8 9 10 11 5 6 7 8 9 0 12 13 13 12 11 10 14 15 DVM 20 21 22 16 17 AUDIO IN (3500A ONLY) AUDIO OUT 18 19 20 21 22 AUDIO OUT Connector Figure 2-1. Connectors and Indicators Subject to Export Control.CHAPTER 2 . OPERATOR’S CONTROLS. see Cover Page for details.OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 2-1. 2-1 . Controls.

Used as output for Demod and Function Generators and for Audio In signal output. CHARGE Indicator Illuminates when external DC power is applied: GREEN YELLOW RED Battery at Full Charge Battery is Charging Battery Charge Failure CONTRAST / • Key Used for selecting the Contrast Adjust Mode. see Cover Page for details. The  UP or  DOWN Keys may be used to adjust the Backlight level to one of 25 different settings. Used for over-the-air tests. Used to add a decimal point (•) to values during data entry. Used for selecting the Backlight Adjust Mode. This is to ensure that all frames and fields are accessed in a predictable fashion. Also used to decrement an edit field. This is to ensure that all frames and fields are accessed in a predictable fashion. NOTE: The on-screen cursor moves in a fixed order. Also used to move the on-screen cursor to the next digit to the right in an edit field. . Also used to increment an edit field. INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS (cont) DESCRIPTION Used to move the on-screen cursor from one frame to another. This is to ensure that all frames and fields are accessed in a predictable fashion. NOTE: The on-screen cursor moves in a fixed order.  UP Key Used to move the on-screen cursor from one field to another within a frame.  LEFT Key  RIGHT Key Used to move the on-screen cursor from one frame to another. Used to receive external modulation input. 2-2 Subject to Export Control. NOTE: The on-screen cursor moves in a fixed order. ITEM OPERATOR’S CONTROLS. The  UP or  DOWN Keys may be used to adjust the Contrast level to one of 25 different settings. AUDIO Connector AUDIO IN Connector (3500A only) AUDIO OUT Connector (3500A only) ANT Connector BACKLIGHT / ± Key Used for connection to the Microphone. NOTE: The on-screen cursor moves in a fixed order. and as input for the SINAD and Distortion Meters and AF Counter. This is to ensure that all frames and fields are accessed in a predictable fashion.2-1.  DOWN Key Used to move the on-screen cursor from one field to another within a frame. Also used to move the on-screen cursor to the next digit to the left in an edit field. Used to change between positive (+) and negative (-) values during data entry.

Soft Key boxes appear at the bottom of the menus/screens. see Cover Page for details. Illuminates when a fault exists in the 3500 / 3500A: YELLOW RED Caution Condition exists Warning Condition exists DC IN Connector Display (LCD) DVM Connector (3500A only) FAULT Indicator Multi-Function Soft Keys Number Keys Five Soft Keys are provided. Provides DC coupled input for the Audio Level Meter and the Oscilloscope (Option) functions. Used for high power direct connection to radio equipment. Alternate key functions are utilized when selecting file names in the Save Screen.2-1. ITEM OPERATOR’S CONTROLS. Used for communicating with external equipment. POWER Indicator POWER Key REMOTE Connector (External I/O) SWR Connector T/R Connector Illuminates when the 3500 / 3500A is powered up. Subject to Export Control. 2-3 . Also used as a transmit signal output. Used for data entry or to select a numbered item. INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS (cont) DESCRIPTION Used for operation of the 3500 / 3500A or battery charging. Used for measuring the VSWR of Antenna systems. Used for powering the 3500 / 3500A ON and OFF. Used for viewing menus and screens. The legends are displayed in boxes at the bottom of the Display.

2-1. OPERATOR’S CONTROLS. Comm Breakout Box Connectors CONNECTOR USB HOST Connector RS-232 Connector ETHERNET Connector REMOTE Connector FUNCTION Used to connect to external unit. . 2-4 Subject to Export Control. INDICATORS AND CONNECTORS (cont) Figure 2-2. Used to connect to RS-232 external unit. Used for communicate with the 3500 / 3500A. Used to connect to an external unit. see Cover Page for details.

2-5 . Menu / Screen Hierarchy Subject to Export Control.2-2. see Cover Page for details. OPERATION SCREENS AND MENU CONFIGURATIONS S Y S TE M * M E NU DUP LE X RE CE I V E R S E LF* TE S T * M E NU S E LF* TE S T TRANS M I TTE R DI AG NO S TI C ANT-CABLE *TE S T CALI BRATI O N AUDI O UTI LI TI E S * M E NU M E TE RS * M E NU ANNUNCI ATO R S I NAD RE M O TE DI S TO RTI O N AF *CO UNTE R AUDI O * LE V E L* M E TE R V E RS I O N DATE * / *TI M E HW* CO NFI G O P TI O NS US B* M ANAG E R UNI T* CO P Y Figure 2-3.

SCREEN ICONS The screen icons are displayed at the top left of the test screens. 41 20 29 SCREEN FEATURE FUNCTION PPC CPU Usage Displays the level of PPC usage. the icon is displayed as four vertical bars. When the PPC usage is 80% to 100%. Battery Level Indicator Displays the percentage of the battery life remaining. Afer editing. Under normal conditions. the lower right half of the icon disappears until the settings are saved to Flash. When the PPC usage is 20% to 39%. When the PPC usage is 40% to 59%. . the icon is displayed as a square.2-2-1. Internal Temperature NUMBER Displays the current FPGA temperature in °C. (Example: 41) When the internal temperature is <-20°C or >85°C. Phase Loop Lock (PLL) Displays the status of the Generator and Receiver Synthesizer Lock. When the PPC usage is 60% to 79%. If the Generator becomes unlocked. a warning message is displayed and a triangle shape is displayed (blinking) above the square icon. a warning message is displayed and a triangle shape is displayed (blinking) below the square icon. 2-6 Subject to Export Control. the icon is displayed as two vertical bars. When the battery level is<20 (on a 0 to 100 scale) the battery level icon blinks. the icon is displayed as vertical bar. If the Receiver becomes unlocked. When the icon is fully drawn. Flash Save Status Displays the status of a save operation. all settings are currently saved to Flash. The icon blinks when the PPC usage is >90%. the icon is displayed as three vertical bars. see Cover Page for details. a warning message is displayed.

a warning message is displayed and the lower half of the icon blinks. T/R Connector Overload Indicates if the T/R Connector is in overload mode. When conditions are normal the icon is displayed as a triangle. DVM Overload Displays the DVM Overload status. If the SWR Connector is in overload mode.2-2-1. RF Temperature NUMBER Displays the T/R Connector temperature in °C. (Example: 29) The RF temperature increases when more RF power is dissipated. If the T/R Connector is in overload mode. (Example: 20) If the battery temperature is >53°C a warning message is displayed and the battery level icon blinks. SWR Connector Overload Indicates if the SWR Connector is in overload mode. AGC Compression Displays the level of Receiver compression. With no AGC compression the icon is displayed as a box. see Cover Page for details. SCREEN ICONS (cont) FUNCTION Battery Temperature SCREEN FEATURE NUMBER Displays the Battery temperature in °C. a warning message is displayed and the lower half of the icon blinks. If the ANT Connector is in overload mode. Subject to Export Control. a message is displayed. When an overload occurs. a warning message is displayed and the lower half of the icon blinks. the icon is displayed as a lightening bolt inside a triangle and the icon blinks. When AGC is in compression. 2-7 . a message is displayed and the icon is displayed as an hourglass. ANT Connector Overload Indicates if the ANT Connector is in overload mode.

RECEIVER TEST 3 . Self Test Menu or Utilities Menu is displayed. 2-8 Subject to Export Control.DUPLEX TEST 2 . the System Menu is displayed. . or when the Meters Menu. SYSTEM MENU When the unit is powered ON.ANT-CABLE TEST .2-2-2.RECEIVER TEST . press the F3 “System” Key to access the System Menu: 1 2 3 4 5 . Displays the Utilities Menu (para 2-2-5). Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2). Displays the ANT-Cable Test Screen (para 2-2-2D).AUDIO Meters System Selftest Util SCREEN FEATURE 1 .DUPLEX TEST .TRANSMITTER TEST .AUDIO F2 “Meters” F3 “System” F4 “Selftest” F5 “Util” FUNCTION Displays the Duplex Test Screen (para 2-2-2A). see Cover Page for details.ANT-CABLE TEST 5 . Displays the Self Test Menu (para 2-2-4). Displays the Audio Test Screen (para 2-2-2E). Displays the Meters Menu (para 2-2-3). Displays the Receiver Test Screen (para 2-2-2B). Displays the Transmitter Test Screen (para 2-2-2C).TRANSMITTER TEST 4 .

Used to select the signal generator frequency.25 kH z Mark: 200 ms Space: 200 ms Z (DCS) (DTMF) SCREEN FEATURE Status (Generator) MHz (Generator) FUNCTION Displays the status (On / Off) of the Generator. Select: Ant.25 kH z Load: High Z Receiver Ext Attn dB: Preamp: More 0. 3k HP 20 29 Freq 1000.00 kH z Modulator FM Group Gen 1: Off 150. see Cover Page for details.0 H z 3. T/R or SWR Subject to Export Control. press the 1 Key to access the Duplex Test Screen: DUPLEX TEST Generator Of f MH z: 40.000000 MHz in 0. 2-9 .50 kH z 6.25 kH z 0.000000 to 1000. Range: 2.0 H z 150.000000 Port : T/R Level: -70 dBm Ext Attn dB: 0 Modulator Gen 1: On Gen 2: On MIC: On Ext Aud: Off Volume: Squelch: Speaker: AudOut: Save Edit 41 Receiver More MH z: 40.0 H z FM Group 6.0 H z Dcs: Non Inv 023 MIC: Off Ext Aud: Off Load: High FM Group 3.000001 MHz increments Port (Generator) Used to select the signal generator output connector.50 kH z DTMF: Burst Trig Lo: 6.25 kH z Seq: 0123456789 Hi: 6.A.0 Auto 100 -50 dBm Audio In Audio In Recall Return Hold Setup PTT on ( CT CSS) Modulator Freq/Code Gen 1: Off 150.000000 Port: T/R Mod: FM 10k AFBW: 0. Du p lex Test Screen When the System Menu is displayed.25 kH z 6.25 kH z 3.

0 7 t o 7 0 7 1 .5k. 25k or 30k (for FM): 5k. 0 3 μV i n 1 d B i n c r e m e n t s 0 . see Cover Page for details.33k. . 8. 7 4 t o 1 2 5 7 4 3 . CCITT BP. Select: 0. Select: Ant T/R SWR Ant T/R SWR -90 to -30 dBm in 1 dB increments -120 to -50 dBm in 1 dB increments -65 to -5 dBm in 1 dB increments 7 . Select: Auto. Select: 0 to 30 dB in 1 dB increments MHz (Receiver) Used to select the signal receiver frequency. 12. Range: 2. 25k. 6. 10k. More Cable Offset (Receiver) Toggles the Receiver Frame to display the Cable Offset and Preamp Fields. 1 1 μV i n 1 d B i n c r e m e n t s 1 2 5 . 0.5k. Cable loss is used by the RSSI and Power Meters to display the power level at the UUT.3k HP or None.0 to 30. Select: AM. The Generator Output Level Units can be toggled between dBm and μV . Select: 0 to 30.01 dB steps Ext Attn dB (Receiver) Used to select the external attenuation on the input connector.0 dB in 0.3k LP. 5k LP. FM or Off 2-10 Subject to Export Control. 8.3-20k BP. C-Wt BP. 3 μV i n 1 d B i n c r e m e n t s SCREEN FEATURE Level (Generator) Select: Ext Attn dB (Generator) Used to select the external attenuation on the output connector.3-3k BP. Du p lex T est Screen ( co n t ) FUNCTION Used to select the signal generator output level. 0.000001 MHz increments Port (Receiver) Used to select the signal receiver input connector.A. Modulation Meter changes to FM DEV. 30k. 12. 0.25k. On or Off Modulation Type Used to select the modulation type. 0. 6. 10k. Used to select the cable loss.33k. 2 2 t o 7 0 7 . 3k LP.000000 MHz in 0.1 dB increments Preamp (Receiver) Used to select preamp operation.0 dB in 0. Select: AM FM Modulation Meter changes to AM%. Select: Ant or T/R Mod (Receiver) Used to select the signal receiver modulation type.3-5k BP.25k. 100k or 300k AFBW (Receiver) Used to select the bandwidth filter. IFBW (field to right of Mod Field) Used to select the IF bandwidth. Select: (for AM): 5k. 15k LP. Select: 0.000000 to 1000.

01 kHz increments Load Used to select the Audio input signal load (Ω). Press F1 “ENTER” Key to toggle between CTCSS.1% increments 0 to 100 kHz in 0. Deactivates the external Microphone input. NOTE: The total combined modulation from all sources in a Group cannot exceed 100% for AM or 100 kHz for FM. Du p lex T est Screen ( co n t ) FUNCTION Used to change functionality of the modulation source fields.01 kHz increments Gen 2 Used to select internal modulation. Select: Select: On or Off AM: Freq %Mod FM: Freq Dev kHz 0 to 20000 Hz in 1 Hz increments 0% to 100% in 0.01 kHz increments MIC Used to select the external Microphone and the level of modulation for the microphone input. 1K (3500A). If the modulation level of a selection source is set to a value that would cause the total modulation to exceed the modulation limit. Select: On or Off AM: Freq %Mod FM: Freq Dev kHz 0 to 20000 Hz in 1 Hz increments 0% to 100% in 0. This setting can be toggled between Gen 2. the value of the unselected sources are lowered automatically.A. DCS (Digitally Coded Squelch) and DCS INV (Inverse DCS). Select: On Off AM FM The external Microphone modulates the test set signal generator. see Cover Page for details.1% increments 0 to 20000 Hz in 1 Hz increments 0 to 100 kHz in 0. 600. 2-11 . Div10 (3500A) or High Z Subject to Export Control. DCS and DTMF modulation source fields.1% increments 0 to 20000 Hz in 1 Hz increments 0 to 100 kHz in 0. Select: 150. CTCSS Modulation Source Fields SCREEN FEATURE Group Gen 1 Used to select internal modulation. 0% to 100% in 0.

743 or 754 Dev kHz 0 to 100 kHz in 0. 172. 612. 155. 073. 343. 565. 132. 654. 662. 612. Select: FM: Inv (Interted). 031. 532. 031. 261. 445. 411. 351. 627. 065. 025. 263. 631. 131. 114. 412. 506. 134. 712. 243. 723. 072. 732. 423. 244. 065. 546. 503. 271. 047. 431. 172. 032. 165. 465. 205. 205. NonInv (Non-Inverted) or Off DCS Code 023. 413. 271.1% increments 0 to 20000 Hz in 1 Hz increments 0 to 100 kHz in 0. 025. 251. 125. 2-12 Subject to Export Control. Select: On or Off AM: Freq %Mod FM: Freq Dev kHz Dcs 0 to 20000 Hz in 1 Hz increments 0% to 100% in 0. 624. 532. 306. 152. 432. 664. 331. 245. 516. 143. 364. 265. 631. 632. 703. 306.01 kHz increments 054. 165. 712. 223. 115. 074. 311. 072. 226. 346. 223. 026. 734. 156. 627. 606. 423. 132. 351. 043. 155. . 606. 026. 152. 051. 116. 251.01 kHz increments Used to select the DCS state. 732. 743 or 754 %Mod 0% to 100% in 0. 315. 245. 047. 226.A. 315. 371. 516. 261. 703. 114. Deactivates the external Audio input. 546. Select: AM: Inv (Interted). 431. 413. 043. SCREEN FEATURE Ext Aud DCS Modulation Source Fields Gen 1 Used to select internal modulation. 371. 664. 115. 734. 143. 412. 071. 506. 465. 116. 466. 632. 073. 263. 346. 054. NonInv (Non-Inverted) or Off DCS Code 023. 731. 731. 162. 432. 265. 174. 364. 503. 662. 243. 445. 131. Select: On Off Permits an external tone generator to modulate the test set signal generator. 125. 162. 331. 032. 565. 464. 654. 074. 411. 365. 156.1% increments 051. 071. 134. 343. 311. 464. Du p lex T est Screen ( co n t ) FUNCTION Used to select external modulation. see Cover Page for details. 624. 723. 365. 466. 174. 244.

Select: 100 to 1000 ms in 1 ms increments Space Used to select the DTMF timing. 600. 1K (3500A).01 kHz increments Up to 12 characters (0 to 9. Deactivates the external Microphone input. B.01 kHz increments 0 to 100 kHz in 0.01 kHz increments SCREEN FEATURE MIC Ext Aud Used to select external modulation. 2-13 . Select: On Off AM FM The external Microphone modulates the test set signal generator. Du p lex T est Screen ( co n t ) FUNCTION Used to select the external Microphone and the level of modulation for the microphone input. see Cover Page for details. A. B. Select: 150. Div10 (3500A) or High Z DTMF Modulation Source Fields Gen 1 Used to select internal modulation.01 kHz increments Used to select the DTMF state. Cont (Continuous) or Off 0 to 20000 Hz in 1 Hz increments 0 to 100 kHz in 0. C. Select: 100 to 1000 ms in 1 ms increments Subject to Export Control.1% increments 0 to 100 kHz in 0. D) Burst. Select: AM: State %Mod Seq FM: State Freq Dev kHz Seq Burst.1% increments (Lo) 0% to 100% in 0.A. Deactivates the external Audio input. A. Load Used to select the Audio input signal load (Ω).1% increments (Hi) Up to 12 characters (0 to 9. Select: On Off Permits an external tone generator to modulate the test set signal generator. D) Mark Used to select the DTMF timing. Cont (Continuous) or Off 0% to 100% in 0. C.1% increments 0 to 20000 Hz in 1 Hz increments 0 to 100 kHz in 0. Select: On or Off AM: Freq %Mod FM: Freq Dev kHz Dtmf 0 to 20000 Hz in 1 Hz increments 0% to 100% in 0. 0% to 100% in 0.

Select: Aud Out Audio In. Restores the screen to active mode. Control frames save settings. Displays the screen of the field selected. then the speaker audio is silenced.A. Speaker Used to select the Speaker Output. Select: -150 to 50 dBm in 1 dB increments Squelch operates in conjunction with the Receiver RSSI Meter. Demod or Fgen Save Recall Meters (not shown) Displays the Save Configuration Screen (para 2-2-7B) to store the current state of the test screen in the internal memory. 2-14 Subject to Export Control. When the RSSI Meter is under this threshold. Freezes the screen. The RSSI Meter does not need to be displayed on the screen for squelch to be operational. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. F2 “Return” / “Save” Return Save F3 “Hold” / “Resume” / “Find” Hold Resume Find F4 “Setup” Displays the Duplex Test Setup Screen. see Cover Page for details. Displays the Recall Configuration Screen (para 2-2-7A) to recall a stored state of the test screen from internal memory. Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen. . Several Meters can be selected to appear on the Duplex Test Screen. Select: 0 to 100 SCREEN FEATURE Volume Squelch Used to select the Squelch level for Duplex and Transmitter tests. Used to scan and find RF signals. Meters are selected in the Duplex Test Setup Screen. Moves cursor into meter / function on test screen. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. Du p lex T est Screen ( co n t ) FUNCTION Used to select the Handset volume level. Meters save configurations and readings. F1 “Edit” / “Done” / “Zoom” / “Enter” Edit Done Zoom Enter Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Select: Audio In. Demod or Fgen Used to select the Audio Output Connector.

Turns RF Generator ON and turns Demod Audio OFF. see Cover Page for details. Du p lex T est Screen ( co n t ) FUNCTION Ptt on Ptt off Esc Activates MIC. Turns RF Generator OFF and turns Demod Audio ON. SCREEN FEATURE F5 “Ptt on” / “Ptt off” / “Esc” Subject to Export Control. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. 2-15 .A. Deactivates MIC. Ends the Field Edit.

000 V 2-16 Subject to Export Control. 0 dB Distortion Audio In 0. 0 kHz RF Power 0.670 kHz RSSI 0.0 Watts SINAD Audio In 0. . 0 Hz DTMF Decode 01234 0123456789 DCS Decode State Run Inv 155 Audio Level Audio In 0. Du p lex T est Screen ( co n t ) When the Duplex Test Screen is displayed. press the F4 “Setup” Key to access the Duplex Test Setup Screen: DUPLEX TEST SETUP Modulation Meter RSSI Meter RF Error Meter RF Power Meter SINAD Meter Distortion Meter AF Counter DTMF Decode 1 4 7 Edit 2 5 8 3 6 9 Return 41 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 DCS Decode Audio Level 29 0 0 Mod-FM Dev 16.0 dBm RF Error 0.A.0% AF Cntr Audio In 0. see Cover Page for details.

Subject to Export Control. 3. etc. 6. Select: 0 (Meter not shown). Select: 0 (Meter not shown). 2. 8 or 9 Distortion Meter Used to select the position of the Distortion Meter on the Duplex Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). 6. 3. 6. 2-17 .e. 8 or 9 SCREEN FEATURE Modulation Meter RSSI Meter Used to select the position of the RSSI Meter on the Duplex Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). 3. 6. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. 2. 6. 8 or 9 DCS Decode Used to select the position of the DCS Decode Meter on the Duplex Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). 3. Ends the Field Edit. 6. 6. 8 or 9 DTMF Decode Used to select the position of the DTMF Decode Meter on the Duplex Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). 3. 6.). Select: 0 (Meter not shown). Du p lex T est Screen ( co n t ) FUNCTION Used to select the position of the Modulation Meter on the Duplex Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). 8 or 9 SINAD Meter Used to select the position of the SINAD Meter on the Duplex Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). 6. Select: 0 (Meter not shown). 8 or 9 Audio Level Used to select the position of the Audio Level Meter on the Duplex Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). Edit Done Zoom Highlights the selected field to be changed. 3. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. 2. Displays the screen of the field selected. Select: 0 (Meter not shown).A. 8 or 9 Meter Chart Displays the areas of the Duplex Test Screen and a number representing each area (i. Select: 0 (Meter not shown). Select: 0 (Meter not shown). 3. 8 or 9 AF Counter Used to select the position of the AF Counter on the Duplex Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). 3. 3 is top right on the Duplex Test Screen.. Select: 0 (Meter not shown). 8 or 9 RF Error Meter Used to select the position of the RF Error Meter on the Duplex Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). 3. 6. see Cover Page for details. 3. 2. Select: 0 (Meter not shown). 8 or 9 RF Power Meter Used to select the position of the RF Power Meter on the Duplex Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). F1 “Edit” / “Done” / “Zoom F2 “Return” F5 “Esc” Displays the Duplex Test Screen. Select: 0 (Meter not shown).

000000 MHz in 0.0 H z 41 20 29 FM Group 6. see Cover Page for details. Used to select the signal generator frequency.0 H z Dcs: Non Inv 023 MIC: Off Ext Aud: Off Load: High FM Group 3.25 kH z Mark: 200 ms Space: 200 ms Z (DCS) (DTMF) SCREEN FEATURE Status (Generator) MHz FUNCTION Displays the status (On / Off) of the Generator. press the 2 Key to access the Receiver Test Screen: RECEIVER TEST Generator Of f MH z: 40.000001 MHz increments Port Used to select the signal generator output connector.B. T/R or SWR 2-18 Subject to Export Control. Select: Ant.000000 Port : T/R Level: -70 dBm Ext Attn dB: 0 Modulator Gen 1: On Gen 2: On MIC: On Ext Aud: Off Volume: Squelch: Speaker: AudOut: Save Edit Freq 1000.25 kH z Load: High Z 100 -50 dBm Audio In Audio In Recall Return Hold Setup ( CT CSS) Modulator Freq/Code Gen 1: Off 150.000000 to 1000.25 kH z 3. .0 H z 3.00 kH z Modulator FM Group Gen 1: Off 150.50 kH z DTMF: Burst Trig Lo: 6. Receiver T est Screen When the System Menu is displayed.25 kH z 0. Range: 2.0 H z 150.25 kH z Seq: 0123456789 Hi: 6.25 kH z 6.50 kH z 6.

1% increments 0 to 20000 Hz in 1 Hz increments 0 to 100 kHz in 0. CTCSS Modulation Source Fields Gen 1 Used to select internal modulation. see Cover Page for details. Select: Ant T/R SWR Ant T/R SWR -90 to -30 dBm in 1 dB increments -120 to -50 dBm in 1 dB increments -65 to -5 dBm in 1 dB increments 7 . Select: Select: On or Off AM: Freq %Mod FM: Freq Dev kHz 0 to 20000 Hz in 1 Hz increments 0% to 100% in 0. Select: AM. DCS and DTMF modulation source fields. NOTE: The total combined modulation from all sources in a Group cannot exceed 100% for AM or 100 kHz for FM. Select: 0 to 30 dB in 1 dB increments Modulation Type Used to select the modulation type. 2-19 . Receiver T est Screen ( co n t ) FUNCTION Used to select the signal generator output level. 1 1 μV i n 1 d B i n c r e m e n t s 1 2 5 . This setting can be toggled between Gen 2. 2 2 t o 7 0 7 .1% increments 0 to 20000 Hz in 1 Hz increments 0 to 100 kHz in 0. DCS (Digitally Coded Squelch) and DCS INV (Inverse DCS). 0 3 μV i n 1 d B i n c r e m e n t s 0 . If the modulation level of a selection source is set to a value that would cause the total modulation to exceed the modulation limit. the value of the unselected sources are lowered automatically.01 kHz increments Gen 2 Used to select internal modulation. The Generator Output Level Units can be toggled between dBm and μV .B. FM or Off Group Used to change functionality of the modulation source fields. 0 7 t o 7 0 7 1 . Press F1 “ENTER” Key to toggle between CTCSS. 3 μV i n 1 d B i n c r e m e n t s SCREEN FEATURE Level Select: Ext Attn dB Used to select the external attenuation on the output connector.01 kHz increments Subject to Export Control. 7 4 t o 1 2 5 7 4 3 . Select: On or Off AM: Freq %Mod FM: Freq Dev kHz 0 to 20000 Hz in 1 Hz increments 0% to 100% in 0.

B.

Receiver T est Screen ( co n t )
FUNCTION Used to select the external Microphone and the level of modulation for the microphone input. Select: On Off AM FM The external Microphone modulates the test set signal generator. Deactivates the external Microphone input. 0% to 100% in 0.1% increments 0 to 100 kHz in 0.01 kHz increments

SCREEN FEATURE MIC

Ext Aud

Used to select external modulation. Select: On Off Permits an external tone generator to modulate the test set signal generator. Deactivates the external Audio input.

Load

Used to select the Audio input signal load (Ω). Select: 150, 600, 1K (3500A), Div10 (3500A) or High Z

DCS Modulation Source Fields Gen 1 Used to select internal modulation. Select: On or Off AM: Freq %Mod FM: Freq Dev kHz 0 to 20000 Hz in 1 Hz increments 0% to 100% in 0.1% increments 0 to 20000 Hz in 1 Hz increments 0 to 100 kHz in 0.01 kHz increments

2-20

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

B.

Receiver T est Screen ( co n t )
FUNCTION Used to select the DCS state. Select: AM: Inv (Interted), NonInv (Non-Inverted) or Off DCS Code 023, 025, 026, 031, 032, 043, 047, 065, 071, 072, 073, 074, 114, 115, 131, 132, 134, 143, 152, 155, 156, 172, 174, 205, 223, 226, 243, 244, 261, 263, 265, 271, 306, 311, 315, 346, 351, 364, 365, 371, 411, 412, 431, 432, 445, 464, 465, 466, 503, 532, 546, 565, 606, 612, 624, 627, 654, 662, 664, 703, 712, 723, 731, 743 or 754 %Mod 0% to 100% in 0.1% increments

SCREEN FEATURE Dcs

051, 116, 162, 245, 331, 413, 506, 631, 732,

054, 125, 165, 251, 343, 423, 516, 632, 734,

Select:

FM: Inv (Interted), NonInv (Non-Inverted) or Off DCS Code 023, 025, 026, 031, 032, 043, 047, 051, 065, 071, 072, 073, 074, 114, 115, 116, 131, 132, 134, 143, 152, 155, 156, 162, 172, 174, 205, 223, 226, 243, 244, 245, 261, 263, 265, 271, 306, 311, 315, 331, 346, 351, 364, 365, 371, 411, 412, 413, 431, 432, 445, 464, 465, 466, 503, 506, 532, 546, 565, 606, 612, 624, 627, 631, 654, 662, 664, 703, 712, 723, 731, 732, 743 or 754 Dev kHz 0 to 100 kHz in 0.01 kHz increments

054, 125, 165, 251, 343, 423, 516, 632, 734,

MIC

Used to select the external Microphone and the level of modulation for the microphone input. Select: On Off AM FM The external Microphone modulates the test set signal generator. Deactivates the external Microphone input. 0% to 100% in 0.1% increments 0 to 100 kHz in 0.01 kHz increments

Ext Aud

Used to select external modulation. Select: On Off Permits an external tone generator to modulate the test set signal generator. Deactivates the external Audio input.

Load

Used to select the Audio input signal load (Ω). Select: 150, 600, 1K (3500A), Div10 (3500A) or High Z

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

2-21

B.

Receiver T est Screen ( co n t )
DTMF Modulation Source Fields

Gen 1

Used to select internal modulation. Select: On or Off AM: Freq %Mod FM: Freq Dev kHz 0 to 20000 Hz in 1 Hz increments 0% to 100% in 0.1% increments 0 to 20000 Hz in 1 Hz increments 0 to 100 kHz in 0.01 kHz increments

Dtmf

Used to select the DTMF state. Select: AM: State %Mod Seq FM: State Dev kHz Seq Burst, Cont (Continuous) or Off 0% to 100% in 0.1% increments (Lo) 0% to 100% in 0.1% increments (Hi) Up to 12 characters (0 to 9, A, B, C, D) Burst, Cont (Continuous) or Off 0 to 100 kHz in 0.01 kHz increments 0 to 100 kHz in 0.01 kHz increments Up to 12 characters (0 to 9, A, B, C, D)

Mark

Used to select the DTMF timing. Select: 100 to 1000 ms in 1 ms increments

Space

Used to select the DTMF timing. Select: 100 to 1000 ms in 1 ms increments

Volume

Used to select the Handset volume level. Select: 0 to 100

Squelch

Used to select the Squelch level for Duplex and Transmitter tests. Select: -150 to 50 dBm in 1 dB increments

Squelch operates in conjunction with the Receiver RSSI Meter. When the RSSI Meter is under this threshold, then the speaker audio is silenced. The RSSI Meter does not need to be displayed on the screen for squelch to be operational. Speaker Used to select the Speaker Output. Select: Aud Out Audio In or Mod

Used to select the Audio Output Connector. Select: Audio In or Mod

Save Recall

Displays the Save Configuration Screen (para 2-2-7B) to store the current state of the test screen in the internal memory. Displays the Recall Configuration Screen (para 2-2-7A) to recall a stored state of the test screen from internal memory.

2-22

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

B.

Receiver T est Screen ( co n t )
FUNCTION Several Meters can be selected to appear on the Receiver Test Screen. Meters are selected in the Receiver Test Setup Screen.

SCREEN FEATURE Meters (not shown)

F1 “Edit” / “Done” / “Zoom” / “Enter”

Edit Done Zoom Enter

Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Displays the screen of the field selected. Moves cursor into meter / function on test screen. Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen. Meters save configurations and readings. Control frames save settings. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. Freezes the screen. Restores the screen to active mode.

F2 “Return” / “Save”

Return Save

F3 “Hold” / “Resume”

Hold Resume

F4 “Setup” F5 “Esc”

Displays the Receiver Test Setup Screen. Ends the Field Edit, but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value.

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

2-23

B.

Receiver T est Screen ( co n t )

RECEIVER TEST SETUP SINAD Meter Distortion Meter AF Counter Audio Level

41 0 0 0 0

20

29

1 4 7 Edit

2 5 8

3 6 9 Return

SINAD Audio In 0. 0 dB

Distortion Audio In 0.0%

AF Cntr Audio In 0. 0 Hz

Audio Level Audio In 0.000 V

SCREEN FEATURE SINAD Meter

FUNCTION Used to select the position of the SINAD Meter on the Receiver Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). Select: 0 (Meter not shown), 2, 3, 6, 8 or 9

Distortion Meter

Used to select the position of the Distortion Meter on the Receiver Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). Select: 0 (Meter not shown), 2, 3, 6, 8 or 9

AF Counter

Used to select the position of the AF Counter on the Receiver Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). Select: 0 (Meter not shown), 2, 3, 6, 8 or 9

Audio Level

Used to select the position of the Audio Level Meter on the Receiver Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). Select: 0 (Meter not shown), 2, 3, 6, 8 or 9

2-24

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

. Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed. 2-25 . 3 is top right on the Receiver Test Screen. SCREEN FEATURE Meter Chart F1 “Edit” / “Done” F2 “Return” F5 “Esc” Displays the Receiver Test Screen.). Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Subject to Export Control. Ends the Field Edit. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value.e.B. Receiver T est Screen ( co n t ) FUNCTION Displays the areas of the Receiver Test Screen and a number representing each area (i. see Cover Page for details. etc.

25k. Select: 0.0 to 30. 6. Select: AM FM Modulation Meter changes to AM%. 12. Select: (for AM): 5k. 10k.3-20k BP. 15k LP. 8. 0.5k. Select: 0. 0. 5k LP.1 dB increments 2-26 Subject to Export Control. 6. Range: 2. T ran smit t er T est Screen When the System Menu is displayed.000000 Port: T/R Mod: FM 10k AFBW: None 41 20 29 TRANSMITTER TEST Receiver More Ext Attn dB: 0. press the 3 Key to access the Transmitter Test Screen: TRANSMITTER TEST Receiver More MH z: 40. More Ext Attn dB Toggles the Receiver Frame to display the Ext Attn dB and Preamp Fields.33k.000000 MHz in 0. 25k. 0.3-5k BP. 12.33k.3-3k BP.0 dB in 0. 8. Select: Ant or T/R Mod Used to select the signal receiver modulation type. C-Wt BP.000001 MHz increments Port Used to select the signal receiver input connector. 25k or 30k (for FM): 5k.5k. see Cover Page for details.3k LP. 30k.0 Preamp: Auto Volume: Squelch: Speaker: AudOut: Save Edit 100 -50 dBm Audio In Audio In Recal l Return Hold Setup SCREEN FEATURE MHz FUNCTION Used to select the signal receiver frequency. Modulation Meter changes to FM DEV. 100k or 300k AFBW Used to select the bandwidth filter.25k. . 3k LP. 0. Used to select the external attenuation on the input connector. IFBW (field to right of Mod Field) Used to select the IF bandwidth. CCITT BP.000000 to 1000.C. 10k.3k HP or None.

Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Select: Auto. Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen. Select: 0 to 100 Squelch Used to select the Squelch level for Duplex and Transmitter tests. Select: -150 to 50 dBm in 1 dB increments Squelch operates in conjunction with the Receiver RSSI Meter. Several Meters can be selected to appear on the Transmitter Test Screen. Select: Audio In. see Cover Page for details. The RSSI Meter does not need to be displayed on the screen for squelch to be operational. When the RSSI Meter is under this threshold. Select: Aud Out Audio In. Control frames save settings. F2 “Return” / “Save” Return Save F3 “Hold” / “Resume” / “Find” Hold Resume Find F4 “Setup” F5 “Esc” Displays the Transmitter Test Setup Screen. Meters save configurations and readings. Restores the screen to active mode. Ends the Field Edit. 2-27 . Speaker Used to select the Speaker Output. Tran smitter Test Screen (cont) FUNCTION Used to select preamp operation. Freezes the screen.C. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. Demod or Fgen Save Recall Meters (not shown) Displays the Save Configuration Screen (para 2-2-7B) to store the current state of the test screen in the internal memory. On or Off SCREEN FEATURE Preamp (Receiver) Volume Used to select the Handset volume level. F1 “Edit” / “Done” / “Zoom” / “Enter” Edit Done Zoom Enter Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. Demod or Fgen Used to select the Audio Output Connector. Subject to Export Control. Displays additional fields on test screen. Displays the Recall Configuration Screen (para 2-2-7A) to recall a stored state of the test screen from internal memory. Used to scan and find RF signals. then the speaker audio is silenced. Meters are selected in the Transmitter Test Setup Screen. Displays the screen of the field selected.

press the F4 “Setup” Key to access the Transmitter Test Setup Screen: TX TEST SETUP Fgen Modulation Meter RSSI Meter RF Error Meter Distortion Meter SINAD Meter RF Power Meter AF Counter 1 4 7 Edit 2 5 8 3 6 9 Return 41 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 DTMF Decode DCS Decode Audio Level 29 0 0 0 Func tion Generator Freq #1: Off 0.20 Vrms Mod-FM Dev 16. 0 kHz Distortion Audio In 0.670 kHz RSSI 0. . 0 Hz DTMF Decode 01234 0123456789 DCS Decode State Run Inv 155 Audio Level Audio In 0. Tran smitter Test Screen (cont) When the Transmitter Test Screen is displayed.C. see Cover Page for details.0 Watts AF Cntr Audio In 0.20 Vrms 0. 0 dB RF Power 0.0 Hz Level 0.0 Hz #2: Off 0.000 V 2-28 Subject to Export Control.0 dBm RF Error 0.0% SINAD Audio In 0.

Since the Function Generator occupies the screen space of two functions on the Transmitter Test Screen. 6. 8 or 9 AF Counter Used to select the position of the AF Counter on the Transmitter Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). 5. 4. 6. 5. 8 or 9 DTMF Decode Used to select the position of the DTMF Decode Meter on the Transmitter Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). 2. the space directly adjacent to the screen space selected must be empty in order for the Function Generator to be displayed. 3. 5. 5. Select: 0 (Meter not shown). 2-29 . 8 or 9 Used to select the position of the RSSI Meter on the Transmitter Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). 2. 4. 2. 3. 8 or 9 Subject to Export Control. Select: 0 (Meter not shown). 5. 5. Select: 0 (Meter not shown). 8 or 9 RF Power Meter Used to select the position of the RF Power Meter on the Transmitter Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). 2. 2. 4.1 Hz increments 0. 3.C. 3. 4. 3. 3. see Cover Page for details. 2.01 V increments SCREEN FEATURE Fgen (Function Generator) The Function Generator utilizes the AUDIO Connector for signal output. Select: 0 (Meter not shown). 4. 2. To select screen space 2. Modulation Meter Used to select the position of the Modulation Meter on the Transmitter Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). 8 or 9 RF Error Meter Used to select the position of the RF Error Meter on the Transmitter Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). 6. Select: 0 (Meter not shown). Select: 0 (Meter not shown). 4. 6. 4. 4. 6. 5 or 8 Select: Select: Select: On or Off 0 to 20000 Hz in 0. 3. 5. 3. 6. Select: 0 (Meter not shown). Select: 0 (Meter not shown). 8 or 9 DCS Decode Used to select the position of the DCS Decode Meter on the Transmitter Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). (e. Select: RSSI Meter 0 (Meter not shown). 8 or 9 Distortion Meter Used to select the position of the Distortion Meter on the Transmitter Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). 4. 2. 6.g. 3. 5. 2.57 Vrms in 0. 5. 6. screen space 3 must be empty) Select: Status Freq Level 0 (Meter not shown). Tran smitter Test Screen (cont) FUNCTION Used to select the position of the Function Generator on the Transmitter Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). 2.00 to 1. 8 or 9 SINAD Meter Used to select the position of the SINAD Meter on the Transmitter Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). 4. 6.

). see Cover Page for details. 6. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. 3 is top right on the Transmitter Test Screen. . 2. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. 3.C. 5.. Tran smitter Test Screen (cont) FUNCTION Used to select the position of the Audio Level Meter on the Transmitter Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). Select: 0 (Meter not shown). 4. 8 or 9 SCREEN FEATURE Audio Level Meter Chart Displays the areas of the Transmitter Test Screen and a number representing each area (i. Ends the Field Edit. 2-30 Subject to Export Control.e. Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed. etc. F1 “Edit” / “Done” F2 “Return” F5 “Esc” Displays the Transmitter Test Screen.

0 45.0 Span (MHz): 10. LOSS or Raw Freq Used to select/display the Center Frequency. press the 4 Key to access the ANT-Cable Test Screen: ANT-CABLE TEST 7. Used to select the mode of testing. ANT . Range: 2.0 Cal Marker Return Hold (RF Mode) SCREEN FEATURE VSWR Progress Bar Type FUNCTION A graphical representation of the percentage completed for the current measurement.0 to 1000.1 MHz increments 10 to 998 MHz in 0. see Cover Page for details. Span Used to select/display the Frequency Span.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30 SWR 41 20 29 1.1 MHz increments Displays the Frequency Span entered by the operator or the calculated Frequency Span if the Start and Stop Frequencies are entered.0 MHz Freq (MHz): 40. Subject to Export Control. Select: SWR.0 MHz in 0.0 Stop (MHz): 45. DTF.00 Type: Edit SWR 35. 2-31 .0 Start (MHz): 35.1 MHz increments Displays the Center Frequency entered by the operator or the calculated Center Frequency if the Start and Stop Frequencies are entered.1 MHz increments 10 to 998 MHz in 0. Range: (SWR) (DTF) (RL) (LOSS) 10 to 998 MHz in 0.D.Cable Test Screen When the System Menu is displayed.1 MHz increments 100 to 998 MHz in 0. RL.

see Cover Page for details. Range: 2. Displays the next pop-up screen.Cable Test Screen ( con t ) FUNCTION Used to select/display the Start Frequency. Stops the action to calibrate the SWR Connector. Range: 2. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the ANT-Cable Test Screen to Scale Mode. including configurations. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value.1 MHz increments Displays the Stop Frequency entered by the operator or the calculated Stop Frequency if the Center Frequency and Frequency Span are entered. F1 “Edit” / “Done” / “Next” Edit Done Next F2 “Return” / “Save” Return Save Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections.0 to 1000 MHz in 0. 2-32 Subject to Export Control. Freezes the screen. F3 “Hold” / “Resume” / “Abort” Hold Resume Abort F4 “Cal” F5 “Marker” / “Scale” “RF” / “Esc” Instruction pop-ups are displayed to calibrate the SWR Connector.1 MHz increments SCREEN FEATURE Start Displays the Start Frequency entered by the operator or the calculated Start Frequency if the Center Frequency and Frequency Span are entered. Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen. Ends the Field Edit. Stop Used to select/display the Stop Frequency. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the ANT-Cable Test Screen to RF Mode. Restores the screen to active mode. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. Marker Scale RF Esc Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the ANT-Cable Test Screen to Marker Mode.0 to 1000 MHz in 0.D. . ANT . readings and settings.

00 VSWR 0.0 0.00 Hold Cal 45.00 0. ANT .00 Cable Marker: 1 Off Delta: 1 Move Left Right Edit Return (DTF .0 Delta 0.0 MHz Pos: 0.1 Ft Pos: dB Hold 0.00 Delta 0. see Cover Page for details.00 35.00 Scale Marker: 1 Off Delta: 1 Move Left Right Edit Return (Marker Mode) ANT-CABLE TEST 0.00 2009-06-25 11:35:30 SWR 41 20 29 1.Marker Mode) Subject to Export Control.Cable Test Screen ( con t ) ANT-CABLE TEST 7.00 Delta 0.00 Cal 415.5 Delta 0.00 2009-06-25 11:35:30 dB 41 20 29 -50.D. 2-33 .

Stops the action to calibrate the SWR Connector. ANT . F1 “Edit” / “Done” / “Next” F2 “Return” / “Save” Return Save F3 “Hold” / “Resume” / “Abort” Hold Resume Abort F4 “Cal” Instruction pop-ups are displayed to calibrate the SWR Connector. RL or LOSS reading. Select: Max. Delta (Bottom) Displays the Delta in Frequency or Distance between the Active Marker selected in the Marker Field and the Marker selected in the Delta Field. VSWR dB Displays the SWR reading. Displays the reading of the Active Marker. readings and settings. Used to select and enable one of three markers on the Graphical Display. Min or Move Move/Min/Max Left Right Pos VSWR / dB Used to move the Active Marker selected in the Marker Field to the left or to the right on the Graphical Display. Freezes the screen. 2-34 Subject to Export Control. . see Cover Page for details. including configurations. Used to move the Active Marker on the Graphical Display. Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen. Displays the next pop-up screen. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Edit Done Next Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections.D.Cable Test Screen ( con t ) FUNCTION A graphical representation of the percentage completed for the current measurement. Select: 1 to 3 SCREEN FEATURE VSWR Progress Bar Marker Marker Status Delta Used to set the Marker selected to ON or OFF. Select: 1 to 3 DTF Delta (Top) Displays the distance to fault. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. Displays the Horizontal Axis of the Active Marker. Used to enable the Delta Marker Function. Restores the screen to active mode. Displays the DTF. Displays the Delta in SWR/Return Loss between the Active Marker selected in the Marker Field and the Marker selected in the Delta Field.

Cable Test Screen ( con t ) FUNCTION Marker Scale Cable RF Esc Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the ANT-Cable Test Screen to Marker Mode. ANT . Ends the Field Edit. SCREEN FEATURE F5 “Marker” / “Scale” “Cable” / “RF” / “Esc” Subject to Export Control. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. 2-35 . Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the ANT-Cable Test Screen to Cable Mode. see Cover Page for details.D. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the ANT-Cable Test Screen to RF Mode. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the ANT-Cable Test Screen to Scale Mode.

8 to 304.0 to 1.1 ft increments. RG-214.5 Loss: 3. R G .5 8 f o a m.8 m in 0.0 Cable: USER Edit 0.5 5 B . Used to select the type of coaxial cable used on the system under test.8 x o r U S E R .5 8 . Select: 0.8 A .1 Velocity: Est Length: Return Hold Ft 0.Cable Mode) SCREEN FEATURE VSWR Progress Bar Cable FUNCTION A graphical representation of the percentage completed for the current measurement. R G . Select: 0. Select: Feet or Meters 2-36 Subject to Export Control.00 in 0. RG-213.0 to 619. Unit Used to select the units of measure.8 fo a m . R G . see Cover Page for details.00 Unit Feet Scale (DTF . R G .01 increments Loss Used to select the cable insertion loss per 100 ft for the cable selected. RG-174.01 increments Est Length Used to select the estimated length of the cable under test. RG-58C.Cable Test Screen ( con t ) ANT-CABLE TEST 0. R G .0 in 0. the frequency span adjusts to the correct level automatically.5 8 A . RG-223. Velocity Used to select the velocity of the propergation (Vp) factor for the cable selected. R G . R G . R G .5 5 A . R G .8 . ANT .D.5 Cal 415.5 8 B . .66 415. Select: 42.1 m increments When an estimated length is entered. Select: RG-400.00 2009-06-25 11:35:30 dB 41 20 29 -50.00 to 100. 12. R G .4 ft in 0. R G .5 5 .

2-37 . see Cover Page for details. Displays the next pop-up screen. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the ANT-Cable Test Screen to Scale Mode. readings and settings. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. Freezes the screen. Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen. including configurations. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time.Cable Test Screen ( con t ) FUNCTION Edit Done Next Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Marker Scale RF Esc Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the ANT-Cable Test Screen to Marker Mode. Subject to Export Control. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the ANT-Cable Test Screen to RF Mode. Ends the Field Edit. Stops the action to calibrate the SWR Connector. ANT .D. SCREEN FEATURE F1 “Edit” / “Done” / “Next” F2 “Return” / “Save” Return Save F3 “Hold” / “Resume” / “Abort” Hold Resume Abort F4 “Cal” F5 “Marker” / “Scale” “RF” / “Esc” Instruction pop-ups are displayed to calibrate the SWR Connector. Restores the screen to active mode.

ANT .Cable Test Screen ( con t ) ANT-CABLE TEST 7. . Displays the next pop-up screen. 2-38 Subject to Export Control. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Select: Fixed or User Top Used to set the upper limit of the Vertical Axis. Select: -100 to 100 Bottom Used to set the lower limit of the Vertical Axis. Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30 dB -50.0 41 20 29 0.D. Freezes the screen. Select: -100 to 100 Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. readings and settings. Restores the screen to active mode.0 0. Used to scale the Vertical Axis of the Graphical Display. Stops the action to calibrate the SWR Connector. F1 “Edit” / “Done” / “Next” Edit Done Next F2 “Return” / “Save” Return Save F3 “Hold” / “Resume” / “Abort” Hold Resume Abort F4 “Cal” Instruction pop-ups are displayed to calibrate the SWR Connector.1 Top: Return 0 Ft Bottom: -50 Hold (Scale Mode) 415.5 Scale: Edit User Cal RF SCREEN FEATURE VSWR Progress Bar Scale FUNCTION A graphical representation of the percentage completed for the current measurement. including configurations. see Cover Page for details.

Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the ANT-Cable Test Screen to Scale Mode. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value.D.Cable Test Screen ( con t ) FUNCTION Marker Scale RF Esc Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the ANT-Cable Test Screen to Marker Mode. Ends the Field Edit. SCREEN FEATURE F5 “Marker” / “Scale” “RF” / “Esc” Subject to Export Control. 2-39 . ANT . see Cover Page for details. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the ANT-Cable Test Screen to RF Mode.

E.57 Vrms in 0.1 Hz increments Level 0. .0 # 2: On 2400.0 41 Level 1.00 Vrms 1. The Audio Function Generator Test Screen utilizes the AUDIO Connector for signal output. Select: 0 to 100 2-40 Subject to Export Control.00 Vrms 20 29 Hz Hz Volume: Squelch: Speaker: AudOut: Save Edit 100 -50 dBm Audio In Audio In Recal l Return Hold Setup SCREEN FEATURE #1 (Function Generator) FUNCTION Used to select Function Generator #1. then the output level of the unselected Function Generator is lowered automatically.00 to 1.57 Vrms. AF GEN Function Generator Freq # 1: On 1000.01 V increments #2 (Function Generator) Used to select Function Generator #2.00 to 1.57 Vrms in 0. see Cover Page for details.01 V increments NOTE: The combined output level from both Function Generators cannot exceed 1. press the 5 Key to access the Audio Function Generator Test Screen. Volume Used to select the Handset volume level. Select: On or Off Freq 0 to 20000 Hz in 0. Select: On or Off Freq 0 to 20000 Hz in 0. If the level of a selected Function Generator is set so the combined output level would exceed 1.57 Vrms. Audio Function Generator Test Screen When the System Menu is displayed.1 Hz increments Level 0.

Displays the screen of the field selected. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. Demod or Fgen Save Recall Meters (not shown) Displays the Save Configuration Screen (para 2-2-7B) to store the current state of the test screen in the internal memory. then the speaker audio is silenced.E. Restores the screen to active mode. Select: Audio In. Meters save configurations and readings. Ends the Field Edit. Meters are selected in the Audio Function Generator Setup Screen. Displays the Recall Configuration Screen (para 2-2-7A) to recall a stored state of the test screen from internal memory. Control frames save settings. Subject to Export Control. Audio Function Generator Test Screen (cont) FUNCTION Used to select the Squelch level for Duplex and Transmitter tests. Speaker Used to select the Speaker Output. F2 “Return” / “Save” Return Save F3 “Hold” / “Resume” Hold Resume F4 “Setup” F5 “Esc” Displays the Audio Function Generator Setup Screen. F1 “Edit” / “Done” / “Zoom” / “Enter” Edit Done Zoom Enter Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Several Meters can be selected to appear on the Audio Function Generator Screen. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. When the RSSI Meter is under this threshold. Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen. Select: -150 to 50 dBm in 1 dB increments SCREEN FEATURE Squelch Squelch operates in conjunction with the Receiver RSSI Meter. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. see Cover Page for details. Moves cursor into meter / function on test screen. 2-41 . The RSSI Meter does not need to be displayed on the screen for squelch to be operational. Select: Aud Out Audio In. Freezes the screen. Demod or Fgen Used to select the Audio Output Connector.

Select: 0 (Meter not shown). 3. press the F4 “Setup” Key to access the Audio Function Generator Test Setup Screen: AF GEN SETUP SINAD Meter Distortion Meter AF Counter Audio Level 41 0 0 0 0 20 29 1 4 7 Edit 2 5 8 3 6 9 Return SINAD Audio In 0. 5. 0 dB Distortion Audio In 0. 8 or 9 AF Counter Used to select the position of the AF Counter on the Audio Function Generator Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). 4.0% AF Cntr Audio In 0. 5. 4. 5. Select: 0 (Meter not shown). 0 Hz Audio Level Audio In 0. 8 or 9 2-42 Subject to Export Control. Audio Function Generator Test Screen (cont) When the Audio Function Generator Test Screen is displayed. . 4.E. 6. 6. 6.000 V SCREEN FEATURE SINAD Meter FUNCTION Used to select the position of the SINAD Meter on the Audio Function Generator Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). 3. 3. Select: 0 (Meter not shown). 8 or 9 Distortion Meter Used to select the position of the Distortion Meter on the Audio Function Generator Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). see Cover Page for details.

e. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value..). Ends the Field Edit. 6. 2-43 . 4. 3. Audio Function Generator Test Screen (cont) FUNCTION Used to select the position of the Audio Level Meter on the Audio Function Generator Test Screen (refer to Meter Chart). F1 “Edit” / “Done” F2 “Return” F5 “Esc” Displays the Audio Function Generator Test Screen.E. Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. see Cover Page for details. 3 is top right on the Audio Function Generator Test Screen. Subject to Export Control. 5. 8 or 9 SCREEN FEATURE Audio Level Meter Chart Displays the areas of the Audio Function Generator Test Screen and a number representing each area (i. etc. Select: 0 (Meter not shown).

SINAD . Displays the Utilities Menu (para 2-2-5). see Cover Page for details.AF COUNTER .AUDIO LEVEL METER Meters System Selftest Util SCREEN FEATURE 1 . Displays the Meters Menu (para 2-2-3). . Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2).DISTORTION 3 . Displays the Self Test Menu (para 2-2-4). Self Test Menu or Utilities Menu is displayed.SINAD 2 .DISTORTION . Displays the AF Counter Screen (para 2-2-3C).AF COUNTER 4 . METERS MENU When the System Menu. press the F2 “Meters” Key to access the Meters Menu: 1 2 3 4 . Displays the Audio Level Meter Screen (para 2-2-3D).2-2-3. 2-44 Subject to Export Control. Displays the Distortion Meter Screen (para 2-2-3B).AUDIO LEVEL METER F2 “Meters” F3 “System” F4 “Selftest” F5 “Util” FUNCTION Displays the SINAD Meter Screen (para 2-2-3A).

‘Audio In’ is the only setting available. Select: 0. Select: 1 to 99 This is the number of readings to average for the displayed value. Select: Limits . 600. 1K (3500A). 0 dB 59.A. press the 1 Key to access the SINAD Meter Screen: The SINAD Meter Screen utilizes the AUDIO Connector and AUDIO IN Connector for signal input. 0-20dB. Subject to Export Control.Lower Auto. Load Used to select the Audio input signal load (Ω). Select: Audio Audio Audio Audio In In In In or Demod (Duplex Test Screen) (Receiver Test Screen) or Demod (Transmitter Test Screen) (Audio Function Generator Screen) When the SINAD Meter Screen is selected from the Meters Menu.0 dBm in 0. SINAD Source Load Avg Reading Range Limits Lower Upper 41 Audio In High Z 1 Auto dB 0.0 (MINI-METER) SCREEN FEATURE Source FUNCTION Used to select the SINAD Meter input source on the SINAD Meter Screen and/or the SINAD Mini-Meter.0 to 60. SINAD Meter Screen When the Meters Menu is displayed.1 0. Div10 (3500A) or High Z Used to select the SINAD Meter Averaging. Range Used to select the meter range.1 dB increments Sets the marker on the SINAD Meter Bar to the Lower Limit selected.0 60.0 Edit Return dB Hold 60. 2-45 . see Cover Page for details.0 20 29 State Off Off SINAD Audio In 0. 0-40dB or 0-60dB Used to enable the SINAD Meter Low Limit. Select: Avg Reading 150.

but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. F2 “Return” / “Save” Return Save F3 “Hold” / “Resume” Hold Resume F5 “Return” / “Esc” Return Esc 2-46 Subject to Export Control. Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Freezes the screen. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen.0 dBm in 0. including configurations.1 dB increments SCREEN FEATURE Limits . SINAD Meter Screen (cont) FUNCTION Used to enable the SINAD Meter Upper Limit. State . readings and settings.0 to 60. Restores the screen to active mode.Lower Limit Used to display the Lower Limit Marker on the SINAD Meter Bar.Upper Limit On or Off Used to display the Upper Limit Marker on the SINAD Meter Bar. see Cover Page for details. Ends the Field Edit.Upper Sets the marker on the SINAD Meter Bar to the Upper Limit selected. Closes the SINAD Meter Screen and returns to the Test Screen. Select: State . Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Select: 0.A. Select: On or Off SINAD Meter Bar F1 “Edit” / “Done” A graphical representation of the received SINAD Meter readings. .

0-20%. Dist ortion Meter Screen When the Meters Menu is displayed.0 (MINI-METER) SCREEN FEATURE Source FUNCTION Used to select the Distortion Meter input source on the Distortion Meter Screen and/or the Distortion Mini-Meter. Select: 0. Range Used to select the meter range.0 0.0 20 29 State Off Off Distortion Audio In 0.1% increments Sets the marker on the Distortion Bar to the Lower Limit selected. ‘Audio In’ is the only setting available. Select: Limits .0% in 0. 0-50% or 0-100% Used to enable the Distortion Meter Low Limit. Select: Avg Reading 150.Lower Auto. see Cover Page for details. 1K (3500A).0% 99. Div10 (3500A) or High Z Used to select the Distortion Meter Averaging.B.0 100.0 Edit Return % Hold 100. Select: 1 to 99 This is the number of readings to average for the displayed value. Select: Audio Audio Audio Audio In In In In or Demod (Duplex Test Screen) (Receiver Test Screen) or Demod (Transmitter Test Screen) (Audio Function Generator Screen) When the Distortion Meter Screen is selected from the Meters Menu. 600. DISTORTION Source: Load: Avg Reading: Range Limits Lower Upper 41 Audio In 150 1 Auto % 0. Subject to Export Control. Load Used to select the Audio input signal load (Ω). 2-47 . press the 2 Key to access the Distortion Meter Screen: The Distortion Meter Screen utilizes the AUDIO Connector and AUDIO IN Connector (3500A only) for signal input.0% to 100. 0-10%.

Ends the Field Edit. . see Cover Page for details.0% in 0. readings and settings.Upper Limit On or Off Used to display the Upper Limit Marker on the Distortion Meter Bar. Select: On or Off Distortion Meter Bar F1 “Edit” / “Done” A graphical representation of the received Distortion Meter readings. Select: State . The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Freezes the screen.B. Dist ortion Meter Screen (cont) FUNCTION Used to enable the Distortion Meter Upper Limit. Restores the screen to active mode.Upper Sets the marker on the Distortion Meter Bar to the Upper Limit selected.Lower Limit Used to display the Lower Limit Marker on the Distortion Meter Bar.1% increments SCREEN FEATURE Limits . Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. including configurations. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. Closes the Distortion Meter Screen and returns to the Test Screen. Select: 0.0% to 100. F2 “Return” / “Save” Return Save F3 “Hold” / “Resume” Hold Resume F5 “Return” / “Esc” Return Esc 2-48 Subject to Export Control. State . Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen.

0 15.0 Edit Return Hz Hold 20000. see Cover Page for details.0 Hz in 0. 2-49 . or Mod (Duplex Test Screen) In or Mod (Receiver Test Screen) In. Demod or Fgen (Transmitter Test Screen) In or Fgen (Audio Function Generator Test Screen) When the AF Counter Screen is selected from the Meters Menu. 1K (3500A). 15-1000Hz. Select: Audio Audio Audio Audio In. 600.0 to 20000.Lower Auto. 15-10000Hz or 15-20000Hz Used to select the AF Counter Lower Limit. Select: 1 to 99 This is the number of readings to average for the displayed value.C. Select: Avg Reading 150.0 20000.0 State Off Off 29 AF Cntr Audio In 0. 0 Hz 4926. Range Used to select the meter range. Demod. Load Used to select the Audio input signal load (Ω).1 Hz increments Sets the marker on the AF Counter Bar to the Lower Limit selected. Div10 (3500A) or High Z Used to select the AF Counter Averaging. Select: Limits . Subject to Export Control. press the 3 Key to access the AF Counter Screen: The AF Counter Screen utilizes the AUDIO Connector and AUDIO IN Connector (3500A only) for signal input. Select: 15.0 (MINI-METER) SCREEN FEATURE Source FUNCTION Used to select the AF Counter input source on the AF Counter Screen and/or the AF Counter Mini-Meter. AF COUNTER Source Load Avg Reading Range Limits Lower Upper 41 20 Audio In High Z 1 Aut o Hz 15. 15-100Hz. ‘Audio In’ is the only setting available. AF Counter Screen When the Meters Menu is displayed.

Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. see Cover Page for details. AF Counter Screen (cont) FUNCTION Used to select the AF Counter Upper Limit. Ends the Field Edit. F2 “Return” / “Save” Return Save F3 “Hold” / “Resume” Hold Resume F5 “Return” / “Esc” Return Esc 2-50 Subject to Export Control. including configurations.Lower Limit Used to display the Lower Limit Marker on the AF Counter Bar. Select: State . Freezes the screen. . Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value.Upper Sets the marker on the AF Counter Bar to the Upper Limit selected. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time.0 Hz in 0. readings and settings.C. Restores the screen to active mode. Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen.Upper Limit On or Off Used to display the Upper Limit Marker on the AF Counter Bar.0 to 20000.1 Hz increments SCREEN FEATURE Limits . Select: On or Off AF Counter Bar F1 “Edit” / “Done” A graphical representation of the received AF Counter readings. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. Closes the AF Counter Screen and returns to the Test Screen. State . Select: 15.

600. press the 4 Key to access the Audio Level Meter Screen. PK2PK or RMS DivBy20 Used to select the divide-by-20 function on the output level (DVM only) Select: On or Off Load Used to select the Audio input signal load (Ω). Peak-. 1K (3500A). The selected impedance value is used to calculate power when the Unit Field is set to dBm or Watts. Audio Level Met er Screen When the Meters Menu is displayed. The Audio Level Meter Screen utilizes the AUDIO Connector. AUDIO LEVEL METER Source Detector Load Range Uni t Av g Reading Li mits Lower Upper 41 DVM RMS High Z Auto V 1 Vol ts 0.000 V 11.0 Edit Return V Hold 50. Select: 1 to 90000 Ω in 1 Ω increments Range Used to select the meter range. 0-1V or 0-3. 400 0. Select: Auto. Div10 (3500A) or High Z High Z Ext Load Used to select the impedance of an external load. Select: Peak+.1V. 2-51 . Select: Audio In DVM 150. 0-0.0 20 DivBy20 Ext Load 29 Off 1 St at e Of f Off Audio Level Audio In 0.5V Subject to Export Control.0 50.5V.2V.D. 0-0. see Cover Page for details. AUDIO IN Connector (3500A only) and DVM Connector (3500A only) for signal input. Select: Audio In or DVM Detector Used to select the measurement type.0 (MINI-METER) SCREEN FEATURE Source FUNCTION Used to select the Audio Level Meter input source on the Audio Level Meter Screen and/or the Audio Level Meter Mini-Meter. 0-0.

Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen. dBuV.D. readings and settings. Audio Level Met er Screen ( co n t ) FUNCTION Used to select the Audio Level Meter units of measure. Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Limits .Lower Limit Used to display the Lower Limit Marker on the Audio Level Meter Bar. Closes the Audio Level Meter Screen and returns to the Test Screen. . including configurations.0 V in 0. Select: On or Off AF Counter Bar F1 “Edit” / “Done” A graphical representation of the received Audio Level Meter readings. Ends the Field Edit. V or Watts SCREEN FEATURE Unit Avg Reading Used to select the Audio Level Meter Averaging.Upper Used to select the Audio Level Meter Upper Limit. F2 “Return” / “Save” Return Save F3 “Hold” / “Resume” Hold Resume F5 “Return” / “Esc” Return Esc 2-52 Subject to Export Control.Lower Used to select the Audio Level Meter Lower Limit.1 V increments Sets the marker on the Audio Level Meter Bar to the Lower Limit selected. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value.1 V increments Sets the marker on the Audio Level Meter Bar to the Upper Limit selected. Select: 1 to 99 This is the number of readings to average for the displayed value.0 to 100. Select: 0.0 V in 0. Freezes the screen. mV. Select: 0. Limits . see Cover Page for details. Select: State . The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. State . Restores the screen to active mode.Upper Limit On or Off Used to display the Upper Limit Marker on the Audio Level Meter Bar. Select: dBm.0 to 100. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value.

SELFTEST 2 . Displays the Diagnostic Screen (para 2-2-4B). see Cover Page for details. Displays the Self Test Menu (para 2-2-4). Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2).DIAGNOSTIC 3 .DI AGNOSTIC 3 . SELF TEST MENU When the System Menu.2-2-4. Displays the Calibration Screen (para 2-2-4C). Subject to Export Control. press the F4 “Selftest” Key to access the Self Test Menu: 1 . 2-53 .CALIBRATION Meters System Selftest Util SCREEN FEATURE 1 .CALIBRATION F2 “Meters” F3 “System” F4 “Selftest” F5 “Util” FUNCTION Displays the Self Test Screen (para 2-2-4A). Displays the Meters Menu (para 2-2-3). Displays the Utilities Menu (para 2-2-5).SELFTEST 2 . Self Test Menu or Utilities Menu is displayed.

Select: Normal Run (runs Self Test one time) Loop All (runs Self Test continuously) TDM Displays the pass/fail status of the TDM (Time-Division Multiplexing) Self Test. . press the 1 Key to access the Self Test Screen: SELF TEST Test Mode: TDM Modulation Pass Pass 41 Normal Run 0 0 Fail Fail 0 0 20 29 Edit Return Start SCREEN FEATURE Test Mode FUNCTION Used to select the run mode of the Self Test. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Modulation Displays the pass/fail status of the Modulation Self Test. Each time the test is performed. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. Terminates the Self Test. Start Stop Esc Initiates the Self Test.A. The fields are cleared if the Self Test is restarted. The fields are cleared if the Self Test is re-initialized. F2 “Return” F5 “Start” / “Stop” / “Esc” Displays the Self Test Menu (para 2-2-4). F1 “Edit” / “Done” Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Ends the Field Edit. see Cover Page for details. Each time the test is performed. Self Test Screen When the Self Test Menu is displayed. the fields next to Pass or Fail are incremented. 2-54 Subject to Export Control. the fields next to Pass or Fail are incremented.

The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run. The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run. STOPPED. Temperature Used to test the Temperature. Loop Selected. then displays RUNNING. The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run. The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run. Diagnostic Screen When the Self Test Menu is displayed. PASSED or FAILED. PASSED or FAILED. STOPPED. STOPPED. then displays RUNNING. Select: Normal Run. Subject to Export Control. 2-55 . Sensing Devices. press the 2 Key to access the Diagnostic Screen: STAND ALONE TEST 41 Mode: 20 Normal Run Distortion Gen Lock Rec Lock Butt on Battery AF Counter Time Domain Freq Domain SWR DTMF DCS 0 Fail: 29 RF CPLD TDM FPGA Temperature AM Mod FM Mod RF Power RF Error RSSI SPI SINAD RF CPLD Edit Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Pass: Return Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid Invalid 0 Start SCREEN FEATURE Mode FUNCTION Used to select the run mode of the Diagnostic Tests. AM Mod Used to test AM Modulation. then displays RUNNING. then displays RUNNING. The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run. TDM Used to test the Time-Division Multiplexing. PASSED or FAILED. Run Selected or Loop All RF CPLD Used to test Complex Programmable Logic Device. STOPPED. PASSED or FAILED. FM Mod Used to test FM Modulation. FPGA Used to test the Field Programmable Gate Array. STOPPED.B. then displays RUNNING. PASSED or FAILED. STOPPED. see Cover Page for details. then displays RUNNING. PASSED or FAILED. The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run.

The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run. Time Domain Used to test the Time Domain. PASSED or FAILED. STOPPED. SWR Used to test the SWR. Button Battery Used to test the battery used to maintain non-volatile memory. see Cover Page for details. PASSED or FAILED. STOPPED. The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run. Distortion Used to test the Distortion Meter. PASSED or FAILED. STOPPED. SCREEN FEATURE RF Power RF Error Used to test RF Error. STOPPED. Freq Domain Used to test the Frequency Domain. The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run. STOPPED. The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run. Gen Lock Used to test the Generator (1st LO / 2nd LO). The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run. PASSED or FAILED. STOPPED. RSSI Used to test the Received Signal Strength Indication. The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run. PASSED or FAILED. then displays RUNNING. PASSED or FAILED. Rec Lock Used to test the Receiver (1st LO / 2nd LO). PASSED or FAILED. PASSED or FAILED. The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run. then displays RUNNING. STOPPED. then displays RUNNING. then displays RUNNING. then displays RUNNING. STOPPED. PASSED or FAILED. then displays RUNNING. The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run. then displays RUNNING. The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run. then displays RUNNING. STOPPED. Diagnostic Screen (cont) FUNCTION Used to test RF Power. The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run. STOPPED. then displays RUNNING. then displays RUNNING. SPI Used to test Serial Peripheral Interface. STOPPED. The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run. then displays RUNNING. SINAD Used to test the SINAD Meter. AF Counter Used to test the AF Counter. PASSED or FAILED. . then displays RUNNING. PASSED or FAILED. STOPPED. The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run. STOPPED. 2-56 Subject to Export Control. PASSED or FAILED. PASSED or FAILED. then displays RUNNING.B. The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run.

but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. see Cover Page for details. SCREEN FEATURE DTMF DCS Used to test the DCS. Terminates the Diagnostic Testing. PASSED or FAILED. The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run. then displays RUNNING. then displays RUNNING. Diagnostic Screen (cont) FUNCTION Used to test the DTMF. STOPPED. The test status field (right of the test) displays INVALID until the test is run. Subject to Export Control. The Pass / Fail Counters are cleared if the Diagnostics Screen is re-initialized. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Ends the Field Edit. Start Stop Esc Initiates the Diagnostic Testing. PASSED or FAILED. F1 “Edit” / “Done” Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections.B. F2 “Return” F5 “Start” / “Stop” / “Esc” Displays the Self Test Menu (para 2-2-4). STOPPED. The Pass / Fail Counters are incremented each time the test is performed. Pass / Fail Counters Displays Pass / Fail record of the Diagnostic Test selected. 2-57 .

Refer to the 3500 / 3500A Maintenance Manual for more information on calibrating the 3500 / 3500A. . 2-58 Subject to Export Control. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed. F2 “Return” F5 “Esc” Displays the Self Test Menu (para 2-2-4). Calibration Screen When the Self Test Menu is displayed.C. Ends the Field Edit. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. press the 3 Key to access the Calibration Screen: CALIBRATION 41 20 29 CAL PASSWORD: 0 Edit Return SCREEN FEATURE CAL PASSWORD F1 “Edit” / “Done” FUNCTION Used to enter the Calibration Password. see Cover Page for details.

Displays the HW Config Screen (para 2-2-5E).VERSION . Displays the Unit Copy Screen (para 2-2-5H). see Cover Page for details. Displays the USB Manager Screen (para 2-2-5G). Displays the Meters Menu (para 2-2-3).UNIT COPY F2 “Meters” F3 “System” F4 “Selftest” F5 “Util” FUNCTION Displays the Annunciator Screen (para 2-2-5A).VERSION 4 .2-2-5. Displays the Options Screen (para 2-2-5F). Displays the Date / Time Screen (para 2-2-5D).HW CONFIG 6 . Displays the Remote Screen (para 2-2-5B).DATE AND TIME .REMOTE 3 .USB MANAGER 8 . Displays the Utilities Menu (para 2-2-5). Meters Menu or Self Test Menu is displayed.HW CONFIG .USB MANAGER . 2-59 . Displays the Self Test Menu (para 2-2-4).REMOTE . Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2).UNIT COPY Meters System Selftest Util SCREEN FEATURE 1 . UTILITIES SCREEN When the System Menu. Displays the Version Screen (para 2-2-5C).ANNUNCIATOR 2 . Subject to Export Control.DATE / TIME 5 .ANNUNCIATOR .OPTIONS 7 . press the F5 “Util” Key to access the Utilities Menu: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 .OPTIONS .

Select: On or Off PTT Used to enable the audible tone when the PTT is pressed on the microphone. Select: On or Off Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections.A. 2-60 Subject to Export Control. Select: On or Off Key Press Used to enable the audible tone on each key press. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Ends the Field Edit. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. Annunciator Screen When the Utilities Menu is displayed. see Cover Page for details. press the 1 Key to access the Annunciator Screen: ANNUNCIATOR Alarm: Key Press: PTT: 41 On Off Off 20 29 Edit Return SCREEN FEATURE Alarm FUNCTION Used to enable the audible alarm. F1 “Edit” / “Done” Edit Done F2 “Return” F5 “Esc” Displays the Utilities Menu (para 2-2-5). .

Select: 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Gateway Used to select the Gateway address. see Cover Page for details. 2-61 . USB or RS-232 Subject to Export Control.B. Select: ETHERNET. Select: 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask Used to select the Subnet Mask address. Select: 1000 to 9999 Ethernet Type Used to select the Ethernet type. the F5 “Config” Key should be pressed whenever the screen is changed. Select: STANDARD or DEV (Scripting Option) Port Currently Active Used to select the active remote connection. Select: ETHERNET. Remote Screen When the Utilities Menu is displayed. Select: 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Ethernet Port Used to select the Telnet port. USB or RS-232 IP Used to select the IP address. SCREEN FEATURE Config Port FUNCTION Used to select the remote connection. press the 2 Key to access the Remote Screen: REMOTE Config Port: IP: Subnet Mask: Gateway: Ethernet Port : Ethernet Type: Port Currently Act ive: 41 20 ETHERNET 10 10 10 193 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9991 STANDARD ETHERNET 29 Edit NOTE: Return Config For screen settings to be effective.

see Cover Page for details. Config Esc Applies the screen parameters for the remote connection settings. SCREEN FEATURE F1 “Edit” / “Done” F2 “Return” F5 “Config” / “Esc” Displays the Utilities Menu (para 2-2-5). 2-62 Subject to Export Control. . Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. Remote Screen (cont) FUNCTION Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Ends the Field Edit.B.

F1 “Edit” / “Done” Edit Done F2 “Return” F5 “Config” / “Esc” Displays the Utilities Menu (para 2-2-5). but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. Subject to Export Control. Select: ETHERNET. USB or RS-232 Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Config Esc Applies the screen parameters for the remote connection settings. USB or RS-232 Port Currently Active Used to select the active remote connection. Remote Screen (cont) REMOTE Config Port: 41 20 USB 29 Port Currently Act ive: USB Edit NOTE: Return Config For screen settings to be effective. see Cover Page for details. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Select: ETHERNET. Ends the Field Edit. 2-63 .B. SCREEN FEATURE Config Port FUNCTION Used to select the remote connection. the F5 “Config” Key should be pressed whenever the screen is changed.

Select: 5. Select: On or Off Port Currently Active Used to select the active remote connection. Select: ETHERNET. 1200. SCREEN FEATURE Config Port FUNCTION Used to select the remote connection. Odd. 4800. 2400. 19200. 38400. 115200 or 230400 RS-232 Parity Used to select the Parity. Select: 300. Select: 1 or 2 RS-232 Flow Used to select the Flow. see Cover Page for details. USB or RS-232 RS-232 Baud Used to select the Baud Rate.B. 57600. 7 or 8 RS-232 #Stop Used to select the Stop Bits. 9600. Select: Even. Space or None RS-232 #Data Used to select the Data Bits. Remote Screen (cont) REMOTE Config Port: RS-232 Baud: RS-232 Parity: RS-232 #Dat a: RS-232 #Stop: RS-232 Flow: RS-232 Echo: Port Currently Act ive: 41 RS-232 19200 None 8 1 XON/OFF On RS-232 20 29 Edit NOTE: Return Config For screen settings to be effective. Select: ETHERNET. . Select: XON/XOFF or Off RS-232 Echo Used to select the Echo. the F5 “Config” Key should be pressed whenever the screen is changed. USB or RS-232 2-64 Subject to Export Control. 6.

Config Esc Applies the screen parameters for the remote connection settings. Ends the Field Edit. 2-65 . SCREEN FEATURE F1 “Edit” / “Done” F2 “Return” F5 “Config” / “Esc” Displays the Utilities Menu (para 2-2-5). see Cover Page for details.B. Remote Screen (cont) FUNCTION Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Subject to Export Control. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value.

Displays the PowerPC processor Version Number/Date. Displays the HW CPLD Version Number. Displays the Unit Serial Number. Displays the Digital CPLD Version Number. SCREEN FEATURE CFM PPC FPGA MFIO RF digital CPLD RF CPLD HW CPLD MAC Address SERIAL F2 “Return” FUNCTION Displays the Coldfire processor Version Number/Date. see Cover Page for details. Version Screen When the Utilities Menu is displayed. press the 3 Key to access the Version Screen: VERSION CFM: PPC: FPGA: MFIO: RF: digital CPLD: RF CPLD: HW CPLD: MAC Address: SERIAL: 41 20 29 Release-3_7_1:01-APR-10 Release-3_7_1:01-APR-10 2. Displays the MAC Address. 2-66 Subject to Export Control. . Displays the MFIO (Multi-Function I/O Hardware) Version Number. Displays the RF CPLD Version Number. Displays the Field Programmable Gate Array Version Number/Date.C. Displays the RF Version Number. Displays the Utilities Menu (para 2-2-5).0.53:07-May-09 2 0x1 0x62 0x93 0x1 00:50:31:09:03:32 301000106 Return This screen is a representation of the screen that appears.

Hours. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Ends the Field Edit. 20 Sec Edit Return This screen is a representation of the screen that appears. Select: Days Month Year 01 to 31 (depending upon month selected) JAN to DEC 2004 to 2099 All Date Fields are scrolling fields. Select: Hours Minutes Seconds 00 to 23 00 to 59 00 to 59 All Time Fields are scrolling fields. press the 4 Key to access the Date / Time Screen: DATE/TIME 41 20 29 Current Date: New Dat e (DMV): New Time (HMS): Friday. 07:44:16. 8 Hr. Displays the Utilities Menu (para 2-2-5).D. Edit Done F2 “Return” F5 “Esc” Highlights the selected field to be changed. 46 Min. Displays the cumulative time the test set has been powered ON (Days. see Cover Page for details. 17-Jul-2009 17 JUL 2009 6 44 2 Cal Due Date: Active Time: 25-JUN-2010 11 Days. Used to select the Date. Date / Time Screen When the Utilities Menu is displayed. Cal Due Date Active Time F1 “Edit” / “Done” Displays the Calibration Expiration Date (DD-MMM-YYYY). 2-67 . SCREEN FEATURE Current Date New Date FUNCTION Displays the current Day of Week. Time (HH:MM:SS) and Date (DD-MMM-YYYY). New Time Used to select the Time. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. Minutes. Subject to Export Control. Seconds).

00 kHz Frequency Find .0 dBm Frequency Find . Select: 5 to 300 Time-Out Timer .0 Edit Return SCREEN FEATURE Save/Recall .0 to 40.Auto Exec Time-Out Timer . Select: 2 to 1000 MHz Frequency Find . Used to enable the Script Autostart Control.50 Start Freq (MHz): 2.Minutes Used to select the number of minutes for the Time-Out Timer.0 Stop Freq (MHz): 1000.Minutes Remaining Frequency Find .Ch Spacing Used to select the channel spacing.0 Ch Spacing (kHz): 12.00 to 5000. press the 5 Key to access the HW Config (Hardware Configuration) Screen: HW-CONFIG Save-Recall: Restore to Default Time-Out Timer: State: Minutes: 41 20 Scripting: Auto Exec: Off 29 On 20 Minut es Remaining: 20 Frequency Find: Threshold (dBm): -30. see Cover Page for details. .Restore to Default Scripting . HW Config Screen When the Utilities Menu is displayed. Select: -110.Threshold Displays the remaining minutes before the Time-Out Timer is initiated.Stop Freq Used to select the stop frequency.Start Freq Used to select the start frequency. Used to select the minimum signal level. Select: On or Off Time-Out Timer . Used to select the Time-Out Timer. Select: 1. Select: 2 to 1000 MHz 2-68 Subject to Export Control.E.State FUNCTION Used to reset all system and screen settings to factory default.

see Cover Page for details. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. SCREEN FEATURE F1 “Edit” / “Done” F2 “Return” F5 “Esc” Displays the Utilities Menu (para 2-2-5).E. Subject to Export Control. Ends the Field Edit. 2-69 . HW Config Screen (cont) FUNCTION Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value.

Displays the ID Number of the test set. press the 6 Key to access the Options Screen: OPTIONS Install Stat us: Unique ID: 35000010 35000001 41 Installed 820902c346237d0d Scope Analyzer 20 29 Never Expires Never Expires Return Inst all This screen is a representation of the screen that appears. Displays the next page of Options if more than 10 Options are installed. Refer to Chapter 4 for more information on installed Options. Used to install Options from USB Memory Device. Displays the previous page of Options if more than 10 Options are installed. Displays the Option Number. 2-70 Subject to Export Control. .F. Name and Expiration Date of the installed Options. Options Screen When the Utilities Menu is displayed. Displays the Utilities Menu (para 2-2-5). see Cover Page for details. SCREEN FEATURE Install Status Unique ID Options F2 “Return” F3 “Pag Up” F4 “Pag Dn” F5 “Install” FUNCTION Displays the status when installing Options.

Used to cancel the save or recall action. USB Manager Screen When the Utilities Menu is displayed. Used to confirm save or recall of screen settings Used to retrieve saved data or test screens from USB Memory Device. F5 “Recall” / “No” Recall No Subject to Export Control. In process or Complete) of the USB transfer activity. Used to save or recall screen captures.G. Displays the status (Stop. Used to erase all Screenshots or Report Files. press the 7 Key to access the USB Manager Screen: USB-MANAGER All Screen Settings Screenshots Report File 41 20 29 Erase from unit Erase from unit Status: Ready Return Save Recall SCREEN FEATURE All Screen Settings Screenshots Report File Erase from unit Status F1 “Enter” F2 “Return” F4 “Save” / “Yes” FUNCTION Used to return all screen settings to default settings. Used to confirm the action for the field selected. Used to save or recall reports. 2-71 . see Cover Page for details. Displays the Utilities Menu (para 2-2-5). Save Yes Used to store data or test screens on USB Memory Device.

Displays the staus (Ready or Busy) of the copy process. Used to copy all the Save/Recall files to the cloned unit after all the Save/Recall files have been deleted from the cloned unit. see Cover Page for details.10. Edit Done Enter Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value.H. Used to select the IP Address of the copy unit. F2 “Return” F5 “Esc” Displays the Utilities Menu (para 2-2-5). Used to copy all the Save/Recall files to the cloned unit. Ends the Field Edit. Unit Copy Screen When the Utilities Menu is displayed. press the 8 Key to access the Unit Copy Screen: UNIT COPY Unit IP addr: Target IP addr: Status: Ready 41 10. 10.193 10 10 10 193 20 29 All Screen Settings Clear and Copy All Screen Settings Copy Edit Return SCREEN FEATURE Unit IP Addr Target IP Addr Status All Screens Settings Clear and Copy All Screen Settings Copy F1 “Edit” / “Done” / “Enter” FUNCTION Displays the IP Address of the source unit. . Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Used to confirm the action for the field selected. 2-72 Subject to Export Control.

20 Vrms 0. 0 dB When the mini-meter is accessed on the Test Screen (F1 “Zoom” Key). There is no Zoom function for the DCS Decode Meter. Subject to Export Control.0 dBm SINAD Audio In 0. DTMF Decode Meter and Function Generator.2-2-6. 2-73 . see Cover Page for details. NOTE: Refer to para 2-2-3 for a description of the SINAD Meter. 0 Hz Audio Level Audio In 0. Refer to the descriptions of the Test Screens for a list of Meters / Functions available for use with each Test Screen.0 Watts RSSI 0. Receiver Test Screen.0 Hz #2: Off 0. the Meter is displayed in full view for adjustment of the meter levels and parameters.0% DTMF Decode 01234 0123456789 Func tion Generator Freq #1: Off 0. Transmitter Test Screen or Audio Function Generator Test Screen is displayed. AF Counter and Audio Level Meter Screens. OTHER METERS / FUNCTIONS When the Duplex Test Screen. there are several Meters / Functions that are available to be placed on the Test Screen. 0 kHz RF Power 0.000 V DCS Decode State Run Inv 155 Distortion Audio In 0.670 kHz RF Error 0. Distortion Meter.0 Hz Level 0. AF Cntr Audio In 0.20 Vrms Mod-FM Dev 16.

. Displays “.-“ when no signal is present. 2-74 Subject to Export Control. Select: Inv (Inverted) or NonInv (Non-Inverted) Meter Readout Used to display the signal level. Select: Run or Stop Format Used to select the signal format. . see Cover Page for details.A. DCS Decode Meter DCS Decode State Run Inv 155 SCREEN FEATURE State FUNCTION Used to enable meter operation.

2-75 . DTMF Decode Meter DTMF Decode 01234 0123456789 SCREEN FEATURE 1st Line 2nd Line FUNCTION Displays the current message being decoded.B. Subject to Export Control. see Cover Page for details. Displays the last full message decoded.

0 Hz #2: Off 0.01 V increments #2 (Function Generator) Used to select Function Generator #2.57 Vrms in 0.01 V increments NOTE: The combined output level from both Function Generators cannot exceed 1.57 Vrms.00 to 1.57 Vrms.0 Hz Level 0. Select: On or Off Freq 0 to 20000 Hz in 0.1 Hz increments Level 0.00 to 1.57 Vrms in 0. then the output level of the unselected Function Generator is lowered automatically. Select: On or Off Freq 0 to 20000 Hz in 0.20 Vrms 0.1 Hz increments Level 0.20 Vrms SCREEN FEATURE #1 (Function Generator) FUNCTION Used to select Function Generator #1. 2-76 Subject to Export Control. Function Generator Func tion Generat or Freq #1: Off 0. If the level of a selected Function Generator is set so the combined output level would exceed 1.C. see Cover Page for details. .

Range Used to select the meter range. Limits . 0-10kHz.Lower Auto.0 kHz in 0.0 to 100. Select: Limits .1 kHz increments Sets the marker on the Modulation Meter Bar to the Upper Limit selected.670 kHz 16. Select: 1 to 99 This is the number of readings to average for the displayed value. 2-77 . State . 0-2kHz. 0-50kHz or 0-100kHz Used to enable the Modulation Meter Lower Limit.Lower Limit Used to display the Lower Limit Marker on the Modulation Meter Bar. Select: On or Off Avg Reading Used to select the Modulation Meter Averaging. see Cover Page for details. 670 0.0 Stat e Off Off 29 Measure Type Peak Hold Avg Reading Range Limits Lower Upper Mod-FM Dev 16. Select: 0. 0-5kHz.0 10. Select: 0.0 Return (MINI-METER) SCREEN FEATURE Measure Type FUNCTION Used to select the Modulation Meter units of measure. 0-1kHz.D.1 kHz increments Sets the marker on the Modulation Meter Bar to the Lower Limit selected.Upper Used to enable the Modulation Meter Upper Limit. PEAK PLUS or PEAK MINUS Peak Hold Used to select the Modulation Meter peak hold. Modulat ion Meter Screen Modulation Meter 41 20 PK-PK/2 O ff 1 Auto 0.0 to 100.0 kHz in 0.0 Edit kHz Hold 20. 0-20kHz. Select: PK-PK/2. Select: On or Off Subject to Export Control.

. Hold Resume Freezes the screen. Select: On or Off SCREEN FEATURE State . Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Modulat ion Meter Screen (cont) FUNCTION Used to display the Upper Limit Marker on the Modulation Meter Bar. including configurations. Restores the screen to active mode. Ends the Field Edit. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value.D. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. readings and settings. see Cover Page for details.Upper Limit Modulation Meter Bar F1 “Edit” / “Done” A graphical representation of the received Modulation Meter readings. Closes the Modulation Meter Screen and returns to the Test Screen. F3 “Hold” / “Resume” F5 “Return” / “Esc” Return Esc 2-78 Subject to Export Control. F2 “Save” Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen.

Select: -200.0 to 200.0 RF Error 0. Select: On or Off RF Error Meter Bar A graphical representation of the received RF Error Meter readings. Select: 1 to 99 This is the number of readings to average for the displayed value.Lower Limit Used to display the Lower Limit Marker on the RF Error Meter Bar.0 Return (MINI-METER) SCREEN FEATURE Avg Reading FUNCTION Used to select the RR Error Meter Averaging.E. -100-100kHz or -200-200kHz Used to enable the RR Error Meter Lower Limit. State .0 Hz in 0. Select: -200. Limits . 0 kHz 500. -20-20kHz. 2-79 .Upper Used to enable the RF Error Meter Upper Limit. -5-5kHz. -50-50kHz. Subject to Export Control. RF Error Met er Screen RF Error Meter 41 20 29 Avg Reading Range Limits Lower Upper 1 Auto State Off Off Hz -200.000 -200. Select: Limits . Select: State . Range Used to select the meter range.Upper Limit On or Off Used to display the Upper Limit Marker on the RF Error Meter Bar.Lower Auto. see Cover Page for details.0 Hz in 0.1 Hz increments Sets the marker on the RF Error Meter Bar to the Lower Limit selected. -1-1kHz. -10-10kHz.0 200.0 Edit kHz Hold 200.1 Hz increments Sets the marker on the RF Error Meter Bar to the Upper Limit selected. -2-2kHz.0 to 200.

SCREEN FEATURE F1 “Edit” / “Done” F2 “Save” Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen. including configurations. Closes the RF Error Meter Screen and returns to the Test Screen. F3 “Hold” / “Resume” F5 “Return” / “Esc” Return Esc 2-80 Subject to Export Control. RF Error Met er Screen ( co n t ) FUNCTION Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. readings and settings. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. .E. Restores the screen to active mode. Ends the Field Edit. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Hold Resume Freezes the screen. see Cover Page for details.

Select: Auto. Limits . 0-1W.5W.01 dB increments 0 to 53 dBm in 0. Select: 0 to 43 dBm in 0. 0-0.10 20. see Cover Page for details.1 Return (MINI-METER) SCREEN FEATURE Units FUNCTION Used to select the RF Power Meter units of measure. 0-10W.00 20 29 State Off Off RF Power 0. 2-81 .01 W increments (with Cable Offset) Sets the marker on the RF Power Meter Bar to the Lower Limit selected.01 dB increments (with Cable Offset) 0 to 20 W in 0. Select: dBm or W Range Used to select the meter range.0 Edit Watts Hold Zero 0.F. 0-20W.01 dB increments (with Cable Offset) 0 to 20 W in 0. Subject to Export Control. RF Pow er Met er Screen RF Power Meter Units Range Avg Reading Limits Lower Upper 41 W Auto 1 Watts 0. 0-5W. -0-0.01 W increments 0 to 200 W in 0.0 Watts 12. Select: 0 to 43 dBm in 0.Upper Used to enable the RF Power Meter Upper Limit. 0-0. Limits .01 W increments 0 to 200 W in 0.2W. 0-100W or 0-200W Avg Reading Used to select the RF Power Meter Averaging. 0-50W.1W. Select: 1 to 99 This is the number of readings to average for the displayed value.8 0. 0-2W.01 W increments (with Cable Offset) Sets the marker on the RF Power Meter Bar to the Upper Limit selected.01 dB increments 0 to 53 dBm in 0.Lower Used to enable the RF Power Meter Lower Limit.

F3 “Hold” / “Resume” / “Abort” F4 “Zero” F5 “Return” / “Esc” Instruction pop-ups are displayed to zero the RF Power Meter. readings and settings. 2-82 Subject to Export Control. Ends the Zero function. see Cover Page for details. Ends the Field Edit.Upper Limit Used to display the Upper Limit Marker on the RF Power Meter Bar. Continues with next step of Zero function.Lower Limit State . . The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. RF Po wer Meter Screen (cont) FUNCTION Used to display the Lower Limit Marker on the RF Power Meter Bar. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. Restores the screen to active mode.F. including configurations. Return Esc Closes the RF Power Meter Screen and returns to the Test Screen. Select: On or Off RF Power Meter Bar F1 “Edit” / “Done” / “Next” A graphical representation of the received RF Power Meter readings. Edit Done Next Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. F2 “Save” Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen. Hold Resume Abort Freezes the screen. Select: On or Off SCREEN FEATURE State .

0-40dBm or 20-60dBm Avg Reading Used to select the RSSI Meter Averaging. Select: -110 to 43 dBm in 0.00 10. -120-(-80)dBm.01 W increments 0 to 100 mW in 0. -60-(-20)dBm.01 mW increments (with Cable Offset) Sets the marker on the RSSI Meter Bar to the Lower Limit selected.G. Select: 1 to 99 This is the number of readings to average for the displayed value.0 dBm -85.0 Return (MINI-METER) SCREEN FEATURE Units FUNCTION Used to select the RSSI Meter units of measure.77 -120.01 dB increments (with Cable Offset) 0 to 100 W in 0.01 dB increments (with Cable Offset) 0 to 100 W in 0. Select: Auto. -100-(-60)dBm.0 Edit dBm Hold Norm -80. Select: dBm or W Range Used to select the meter range.01 dB increments -110 to 53 dBm in 0. see Cover Page for details.01 dB increments -110 to 53 dBm in 0. 2-83 . Limits . Limits . Select: -110 to 43 dBm in 0.01 mW increments (with Cable Offset) Sets the marker on the RSSI Meter Bar to the Upper Limit selected.Upper Used to enable the RSSI Meter Upper Limit. -80-(-40)dBm. -20-20dBm. RSSI Met er Screen RSSI Meter Units Range Avg Reading Limits Lower Upper 41 dBm Auto 1 dBm -110. Subject to Export Control. -40-0dBm.Lower Used to enable the RSSI Meter Lower Limit.00 20 29 State Off Off RSSI 0.01 W increments 0 to 100 mW in 0.

Lower Limit State . Select: On or Off RSSI Meter Bar F1 “Edit” / “Done” / “Next” A graphical representation of the received RSSI Meter readings. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. F3 “Hold” / “Resume” F4 “Norm” / “Abort” Norm Abort F5 “Return” / “Esc” Return Esc 2-84 Subject to Export Control. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Edit Done Next Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Hold Resume Freezes the screen. see Cover Page for details. Select: On or Off SCREEN FEATURE State . Continues with next step of Zero function. F2 “Save” Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. readings and settings. Closes the RSSI Meter Screen and returns to the Test Screen. Restores the screen to active mode. Ends the Normalize function.G. Ends the Field Edit. RSSI Meter Screen (cont) FUNCTION Used to display the Lower Limit Marker on the RSSI Meter Bar. .Upper Limit Used to display the Upper Limit Marker on the RSSI Meter Bar. Instruction pop-ups are displayed to normalize the RSSI Meter. including configurations.

2-2-7. A. OTHER FUNCTIONS Recall Configurat ion Screen When the Duplex Test Screen. Erases the selected stored test screen from internal memory. Recall Screen Configuration 41 20 29 Default Delete Recall Return SCREEN FEATURE Recall Selection Default F1 “Delete” F2 “Recall” F5 “Return” FUNCTION Displays the test screens stored in internal memory. or Audio Function Generator Screen is displayed. Receiver Test Screen. Retrieves selected test screen from internal memory. The Recall Configuration Screen gives the user access to recall a test screen from internal memory. Restores the test screen to a known condition. 2-85 . Subject to Export Control. see Cover Page for details. Closes the Recall Configuration Screen and returns to the Test Screen. Transmitter Test Screen. access the Recall Field and press the F1 “Zoom” Key to display the Recall Configuration Screen.

TUV8 .MNO6 . Receiver Test Screen. Hints F1 “Edit” / “Done” Shows the numeric and corresponding alphabetical characters for use when entering a new file name.JKL5 . . Transmitter Test Screen.B. Save Screen Configuration Edit File Name: 41 20 29 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Edit Store -1 . Ends the Field Edit.WXYZ9 -0 Return SCREEN FEATURE Edit File Name FUNCTION Used to enter a new file name (5 characters maximum). see Cover Page for details. Return Esc Closes the Save Configuration Screen and returns to the Test Screen. Ends the Field Edit.ABC2 . 2-86 Subject to Export Control. access the Save Field and press the F1 “Zoom” Key to display the Save Configuration Screen. Use Number Keys and UP / DOWN Keys to enter characters.GHI4 .DEF3 . Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. F2 “Store” F5 “Return” / Esc” Saves the selected test screen into internal memory.PQRS7 . or Audio Function Generator Screen is displayed. The Save Configuration Screen gives the user access to store a test screen into internal memory. Save Configurat ion Screen When the Duplex Test Screen.

bolts or screws C. Routine Checks Preventive Maintenance is limited to routine checks such as shown below:        Cleaning Dusting Wiping Checking for frayed cables Storing items not in use Covering unused receptacles Checking for loose nuts.2-3. see Cover Page for details. A. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES GENERAL When doing any Preventive Maintenance or routine checks. Subject to Export Control. 2-87 . Sch ed u le o f Ch ecks Perform routine checks whenever required. Materials and Equipmen t Required No tools or equipment are required for operator preventive maintenance. 2-3-2. keep in mind the WARNINGS and CAUTIONS about electrical shock and bodily harm. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Tools. B. 2-3-1. Cleaning materials required are a lint free cloth and mild liquid detergent.

The Opening Screen is displayed. Inc.53:07-May-09 2 0x1 0x62 0x93 0x1 00:50:31:09:03:32 301000106 Meters System Selftest Util This screen is a representation of the screen that appears. 2-4-1. After a few minutes.RECEIVER TEST . the Startup Screen is displayed and then the 3500 / 3500A displays the System Menu. 2006 All rights reserved VERSION CFM: PPC: FPGA: MFIO: RF: digital CPLD: RF CPLD: HW CPLD: MAC Address: SERIAL: 41 20 29 1 2 3 4 5 . OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS TURN-ON PROCEDURE Follow these instructions to initialize the 3500 / 3500A: 1. see Cover Page for details. 2-88 Subject to Export Control. 2. POWER Indicator 062-002 3. .ANT-CABLE TEST .2-4.AUDIO Release-3_7_1:01-APR-10 Release-3_7_1:01-APR-10 2. 3500 Series Aeroflex Wichita/June 2006 Copyright © Aeroflex Wichita.DUPLEX TEST .0.TRANSMITTER TEST . Verify the POWER Indicator illuminates GREEN. Press the POWER Key to initialize the 3500 / 3500A.

Press the associated key to display the desired screen.DISTORTION .RECEIVER TEST .SELFTEST 2 .VERSION .DIAGNOSTIC 3 .ANT-CABLE TEST . 1 2 3 4 5 .ANNUNCIATOR .HW CONFIG .SINAD .OPTIONS . TURN-ON PROCEDURE (cont) The operator can now choose the desired menu / screen: TEST SCREENS Press the associated key to display the desired screen. 1 2 3 4 .REMOTE .DUPLEX TEST .UNIT COPY Meters System Selftest Util Subject to Export Control. 2-89 .AUDIO LEVEL METER Meters System Selftest Util SELF TEST MENU Press the F4 “Selftest” Key on the System Menu to display the Self Test Menu. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 .DATE AND TIME .CALIBRATION Meters System Selftest Util UTILITIES MENU Press the F5 “Util” Key on the System Menu to display the Utilities Menu.2-4-1. 1 .USB MANAGER . see Cover Page for details. Press the associated key to display the desired screen.AF COUNTER . Press the associated key to display the desired screen.TRANSMITTER TEST . 4.AUDIO Meters System Selftest Util METERS MENU Press the F2 “Meters” Key on the System Menu to display the Meters Menu.

2-90 Subject to Export Control. 0% 100 -50 dBm Audio In Audio In Recall AF Cntr Audio In 0. SCREEN WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS The 3500 / 3500A provides the user with alarm prompts to warn the user of an impending condition that might damage the 3500 / 3500A.625000 Port : SWR Level: -50 dBm Ext Attn dB: 0 Modulator Gen 1: Off Gen 2: On MIC: On Ext Aud: Off Volume: Squelch: Speaker: AudOut: Save Freq 1000.25 kH z 3.25 kH z Load: High Z Distortion Audio In 0. see Cover Page for details.2-4-2.0 H z 41 20 29 SINAD Audio In 0. RECEIVER TEST Generator Of f MH z: 151. . All screen activity and updates are placed on hold until the condition is cleared.0 dB FM Group 6.25 kH z 6.0 Hz SWR OVERLOAD! Remove power from SWR port! Ent er This screen is a representation of the screen that appears.0 H z 150. The alarm prompts are displayed at the bottom of the test screen.

. replace the antenna. Refer to para 2-2 for further description of the operation screens and menus. When the 3500 / 3500A is used in conjunction with the BIT built into the UUT.2-5. OPERATING PROCEDURES Operating Procedures for the 3500 / 3500A are provided. If the UUT is not operational. with a 95% probability rate. the user can determine where the fault lies to such a level as to recommend corrective action (i. indicators and connectors. 2-5-1.). that the installation is operational. see Cover Page for details. return the radio for repair etc. the user is able to establish. 2-91 . Refer to para 2-1 for further description of the controls. INTRODUCTION The 3500 / 3500A is intended to be used to determine that all external connections are in place on the vehicle radio installation and that the antenna is connected and matched to the transmitter. Subject to Export Control.e.

DUP LEX TEST 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Generator Of f MHz: 40. Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting.0 H z 3. Connect the Headset to the 3500 / 3500A AUDIO Connector.25 k z H Ext Aud: Off Load: High Z Volume: 100 Squelch: -50 dB m Speaker: Audio In AudOut: Audio In Save Recall Edit Return Hold Setup 29 Ptt on 4.25 kH z Ge n 2: On 150.25 kH z MIC: On 6. see Cover Page for details. ANT REMOTE 062-007 2. 1. 3k HP Modulator Freq FM Group Ge n 1: On 1000. With the cursor on the Generator Port Field. .000000 MH z: 40. AUDIO REMOTE 062-008 3. 41 20 DUPLEX TEST Ge nerator Of f Receiver More MH z: 40. press the F1 “Edit” Key and use the  UP Key or  DOWN Key to select the ANT Connector. TYPICAL VEHICLE INSTALLATION TEST Connect the appropriate supplied Antenna to the 3500 / 3500A ANT Connector.2-5-2. The Duplex Test Screen should be displayed.000000 Port: T/R Port: T/R Level: -70 dBm Mod: FM 10k Ext Attn dB: 0 AFBW: 0.000000 Po rt : Ant Level: -70 dBm Ext Attn dB: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 9 0 2-92 Subject to Export Control.0 H z 6.

000000 MH z: 40.0 H z 3. With the cursor on the Generator Level Field. 41 20 DUPLEX TEST Ge nerator Of f Receiver More MH z: 40. DUP LEX TEST 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Generator Of f MHz: 40.25 k z H Ext Aud: Off Load: High Z Volume: 100 Squelch: -50 dB m Speaker: Audio In AudOut: Audio In Save Recall Edit Return Hold Setup 29 DUP LEX TEST SETUP Modulation Meter RSSI Meter: RF Error Met er: RF Power Meter SINAD Meter Distortion Meter: AF Counter DTMF Decode 1 4 7 Ptt on Edit 2 5 8 3 6 9 Return 41 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 DCS Decode Audio Level 29 0 0 Subject to Export Control. press the F1 “Edit” Key and use the  LEFT.25 kH z MIC: On 6. 5. 2-93 .000000 Po rt : Ant Level: -70 dBm Ext Attn dB: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 9 0 7. 3k HP Modulator Freq FM Group Ge n 1: On 1000. DUP LEX TEST 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Generator Of f MHz: 40.25 kH z Ge n 2: On 150.000000 Port: T/R Port: T/R Level: -70 dBm Mod: FM 10k Ext Attn dB: 0 AFBW: 0.  RIGHT and Number Keys to select the desired RF level. Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting. Press the F4 “Setup” Key to display the Duplex Setup Screen. press the F1 “Edit” Key and use the  LEFT.  RIGHT and Number Keys to select the desired frequency.0 H z 6.000000 Po rt : Ant Level: -70 dBm Ext Attn dB: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 9 0 6. Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting. see Cover Page for details.2-5-2. TYPICAL VEHICLE INSTALLATION TEST (cont) With the cursor on the Generator MHz Field.

Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting. With the cursor on the RSSI Meter Field. DUP LEX TEST SETUP Modulation Meter RSSI Meter: RF Error Met er: RF Power Meter SINAD Meter Distortion Meter: AF Counter DTMF Decode 1 7 8 41 3 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 DCS Decode Audio Level 29 0 0 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 5 6 2 5 8 3 6 9 Return 7 8 4 7 Done 9 0 9 0 10.2-5-2. DUP LEX TEST SETUP Modulation Meter RSSI Meter: RF Error Met er: RF Power Meter SINAD Meter Distortion Meter: AF Counter DTMF Decode 1 7 8 41 3 6 9 0 0 0 0 0 20 DCS Decode Audio Level 29 0 0 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 5 6 2 5 8 3 6 9 Return 7 8 4 7 Done 9 0 9 0 2-94 Subject to Export Control. press the F1 “Edit” Key and the 6 Key to display the RSSI Meter in the middle right portion of the Duplex Test Screen. With the cursor on the RF Error Meter Field. press the F1 “Edit” Key and the 9 Key to display the RF Error Meter in the bottom right portion of the Duplex Test Screen. DUP LEX TEST SETUP Modulation Meter RSSI Meter: RF Error Met er: RF Power Meter SINAD Meter Distortion Meter: AF Counter DTMF Decode 1 7 8 41 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 DCS Decode Audio Level 29 0 0 1 2 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 5 6 2 5 8 3 6 9 Return 7 8 4 7 Done 9 0 9 0 9. Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting. TYPICAL VEHICLE INSTALLATION TEST (cont) With the cursor on the Modulation Meter Field. press the F1 “Edit” Key and the 3 Key to display the Modulation Meter in the top right portion of the Duplex Test Screen. Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting. see Cover Page for details. 8. .

see Cover Page for details. 15. DUP LEX TEST SETUP Modulation Meter RSSI Meter: RF Error Met er: RF Power Meter SINAD Meter Distortion Meter: AF Counter DTMF Decode 1 4 7 Done 2 5 8 3 6 9 Return 41 3 6 9 0 0 0 0 0 20 DCS Decode Audio Level 29 0 0 DUPLEX TEST 41 20 29 MOD-FM Dev 16.0 dBm RF Error 0. If Antenna test is positive. If malfunction(s) occur in the testing process. Subject to Export Control. Repeat this test at different locations around the antenna. 11. check the Antenna under test first using SWR.0 kHz Setup Ptt on 12.43 5 kHz Ge nerator Of f Receiver More MHz: 40.25 kHz Ext Aud: Off Load: High Z Volume: 100 Squelch: -50 dBm Speaker: Audio In AudOut: Audio In Save Recall Edit Return Hold RSSI 0. troubleshoot malfunction(s) in Radio.000000 Port: T/R Port: T/R Level: -70 dBm Mod: FM 10k Ext Attn dB: 0 AFBW: None Modulator Freq FM Group Ge n 1: On 1000. Monitor field strength indicator for proper signal level. talk back and forth on several frequencies to determine that the radio is transmitting and receiving messages over the entire system. 14.2-5-2. 13. 2-95 . With a second operator in the vehicle.25 kHz MIC: On 6.0 Hz 6.000 000 MHz: 40.0 Hz 3.25 k Hz Ge n 2: On 150. TYPICAL VEHICLE INSTALLATION TEST (cont) Press the F2 “Return” Key to display the Duplex Test Screen. Stand within 5 ft of the vehicle antenna.

repeat this test at each bulkhead to determine if a bad connection exists between the antenna and the Radio. For installations with multiple bulkhead connections. If a RF Power Amplifier is installed between the Radio and antenna. Perform BIT (SELF TEST) on the Radio to detect radio faults not related to the RF output. Unkey the Radio. . select Receiver Test and set up the RF level so a 1 kHz tone can be heard in the Radio (add 150 Hz squelch tone if required). then measure between the Radio and the RF Power Amplifier to determine if the Radio or the RF Power Amplifier is faulty.2-5-3. 2. 2-96 Subject to Export Control. Connect the antenna to the 3500 / 3500A SWR Connector and measure VSWR. 4. Measure sensitivity by reducing the RF level of the 3500 / 3500A until the audio signal can no longer be heard in the Radio. If the Radio rated output power is >20 W. Select frequency and modulation. frequency and modulation. The 3500 / 3500A SWR Connector needs to be calibrated the first time. insert attenuator between the T/R Connector and the Radio Antenna port. see Cover Page for details. ADVANCED VEHICLE INSTALLATION TESTING Connect the 3500 / 3500A T/R Connector to the Radio Antenna Port. Key the Radio and measure the Radio’s forward output power. 1. 5. take a measurement between the RF Power Amplifier and the antenna (install the optional attenuator). 3.

0 Retu rn Hold 45.0 Type: SWR MHz Freq (MHz): 40. 2-97 .00 35. Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting. press the 4 Key to display the ANT-Cable Test Screen. With the cursor on the Freq Field.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30 1 2 41 20 29 SWR 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 1.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30 1 2 41 20 29 SWR 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 1.0 Cal Ma rker 7 8 9 0 Edit 2. MEASURING SWR With the System Menu displayed.0 Retu rn Hold 45.2-5-4.0 Sto p (MHz): 45.0 Span (MHz): 10. press the F1 “Edit” Key and use the Number Keys to select the desired center frequency. ANT-CABLE TEST 7.00 35. press the F1 “Edit” Key and use the  UP Key or  DOWN Key to select SWR.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30 1 2 41 20 29 SWR 3 4 5 6 1. ANT-CABLE TEST 7.0 Sta rt (MHz): 35. ANT-CABLE TEST 7.0 Sta rt (MHz): 35.0 Cal Ma rker 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 0 9 0 Edit 3.0 Type: SWR MHz Freq (MHz): 40. see Cover Page for details.0 Cal Ma rker 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 0 9 0 Edit Subject to Export Control.0 Sto p (MHz): 45.0 Sta rt (MHz): 35.0 Sto p (MHz): 45.0 Type: SWR MHz Freq (MHz): 40.0 Span (MHz): 10. With the cursor on the Type Field.00 35.0 Span (MHz): 10.0 Retu rn Hold 45. 1. Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting.

2-5-4.
4.

MEASURING SWR (cont)
With the cursor on the Span Field, press the F1 “Edit” Key and use the Number Keys to select the desired frequency span. Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting.
ANT-CABLE TEST 7.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30
1 2

41

20

29

SWR

1

2

3

4

3

4

5

6

1.00 35.0 Type: SWR MHz Freq (MHz): 40.0 Sta rt (MHz): 35.0 Retu rn Hold 45.0 Span (MHz): 10.0 Sto p (MHz): 45.0 Cal Ma rker

5

6

7

8

7

8

9

0

9

0

Edit

5.

Press the F4 “Cal” Key to start the SWR Calibration. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the SWR Calibration. When SWR Calibration is completed (“Calibration Complete” displayed on screen), press the F5 “Done” Key to return to the ANT-Cable Test Screen. NOTE: Calibration must be performed at the point the operator is connecting to the system under test:

• •

If the supplied test cable is being used to connect to the system under test, calibration is to be performed at the end of the test cable. Test cable should not exceed four feet in length. If the system under test cable is being connected directly to the 3500 / 3500A, then calibration is to be performed at the SWR Connector.
ANT-CABLE TEST 7.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30 41 20 29

1

2

SWR

1

2

3

4

3

4

5

6

1.00 35.0 Type: SWR MHz Freq (MHz): 40.0 Sta rt (MHz): 35.0 Retu rn Hold 45.0 Span (MHz): 10.0 Sto p (MHz): 45.0 Cal Ma rker

5

6

7

8

7

8

9

0

9

0

Edit

NOTE:

Once the SWR Connection is calibrated, the SWR Connector remains in the calibration state until the user changes the point of connection to the UUT. The ANT-Cable Test Screen displays the Date and Time of the last Calibration above the Graphical Display.

2-98

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

2-5-4.
6. 7.

MEASURING SWR (cont)
Connect the System Under Test to the SWR Connector at the point of calibration. The Graphical Display is updated approximately every 20 seconds. Allow at least two updates of the Graphical Display to insure data is valid. NOTE: The 3500 / 3500A checks the electrical length of the load under test. If the frequency span selected is too wide, the 3500 / 3500A automatically adjusts the frequency span to insure an accurate measurement, and displays ‘Span Clipped’ above the graphical display to alert the user the frequency span was changed.

8.

Press the F5 ”Marker” Key to display the ANT-Cable Test Screen in Marker Mode.
ANT-CABLE TEST 7.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30
1 2

41

20

29

SWR

3

4

5

6

1.00 35.0 Marker: 1 Off Delta: 1 Move Left Right Edit Retu rn MHz Pos: 0.00 VSWR 0. 00 Hold Cal 45.0 Delt a 0.00 Delta 0.00 S cale

7

8

9

0

9.

With the data displayed on the Graphical Display, the Markers are used to determine the SWR at any point across the span. With the cursor on the Marker Number Field, use the  UP Key or  DOWN Key to select a Marker (1, 2 or 3). Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting.
ANT-CABLE TEST 7.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30
1 2

41

20

29

SWR

1

2

3

4

3

4

5

6

1.00 35.0 Marker: 1 Off Delta: 1 Move Left Right Edit Retu rn MHz Pos: 0.00 VSWR 0. 00 Hold Cal 45.0 Delt a 0.00 Delta 0.00 S cale

5

6

7

8

7

8

9

0

9

0

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

2-99

2-5-4.
10.

MEASURING SWR (cont)
Move the cursor to the right and use the  UP Key or  DOWN Key to select On.
ANT-CABLE TEST 7.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30
1 2

41

20

29

SWR

3

4

5

6

1.00 35.0 Marker: 1 On Delta: 1 Move Left Right Edit Retu rn MHz Pos: 0.00 VSWR 0. 00 Hold Cal 45.0 Delt a 0.00 Delta 0.00 S cale

7

8

9

0

11.

With the cursor on the Move/Min/Max Field, press the F1 “Edit” Key and use the  UP Key or  DOWN Key to select Move. Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting. NOTE: Selecting “Move” positions the Marker to the next Data Point on the Graphical Display.
ANT-CABLE TEST 7.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30
1 2

41

20

29

SWR

1

2

3

4

3

4

5

6

1.00 35.0 Marker: 1 Off Delta: 1 Move Left Right Edit Retu rn MHz Pos: 0.00 VSWR 0. 00 Hold Cal 45.0 Delt a 0.00 Delta 0.00 S cale

5

6

7

8

7

8

9

0

9

0

2-100

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

2-5-4.
12.

MEASURING SWR (cont)
With the cursor on the Right Field, press the F1 “Enter” Key to move the Marker to the right on the Graphical Display.
ANT-CABLE TEST 7.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30 SWR 1 1.00 35.0 Marker: 1 Off Delta: 1 Move Left Right Edit Retu rn MHz Pos: 0.00 VSWR 0. 00 Hold Cal 45.0 Delt a 0.00 Delta 0.00 S cale
1 2

41

20

29

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

NOTE:

When first enabled, a Marker is at the far left of the Graphical Display. Up to three Markers may be placed on the Graphical Display at a time. The Marker shown in the Marker Number Field is active. The active Marker can be moved using the Move/Min/Max and Left Right Fields with the readings, corresponding to the Marker position, displayed in fields under the Graphical Display.

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

2-101

2-5-5.
1.

MEASURING DTF (Distance to Fault)
With the System Menu displayed, press the 4 Key to display the ANT-Cable Test Screen.
ANT-CABLE TEST 7.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30
1 2

41

20

29

SWR

3

4

5

6

1.00 35.0 Type: SWR MHz Freq (MHz): 40.0 Sta rt (MHz): 35.0 Retu rn Hold 45.0 Span (MHz): 10.0 Sto p (MHz): 45.0 Cal Ma rker

7

8

9

0

Edit

2.

Press the F4 “Cal” Key to start the SWR Calibration. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the SWR Calibration. When SWR Calibration is completed (“Calibration Complete” displayed on screen), press the F5 “Done” Key to return to the ANT-Cable Test Screen. NOTE: Calibration must be performed at the point the operator is connecting to the system under test:

• •

If the supplied test cable is being used to connect to the system under test, calibration is to be performed at the end of the test cable. Test cable should not to exceed four feet in length. If the system under test cable is being connected directly to the 3500 / 3500A, then calibration is to be performed at the SWR Connector.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

NOTE:

Once the SWR Connection is calibrated, the SWR Connector remains in the calibration state until the user changes the point of connection to the UUT. The ANT-Cable Test Screen displays the Date and Time of the last Calibration above the Graphical Display.

2-102

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

00 Unit Feet S cale 7 8 9 0 Edit Subject to Export Control.0 Retu rn Hold 408. ANT-CABLE TEST 0.66 408.0 0.0 Type: DTF ft Fre q (MHz): 40 .00 2009-01-06 11:35:30 1 2 41 20 29 dB 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 -50 .0 Cal Ma rker 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 0 9 0 Edit 5.0 0.8 Span (MHz): 10 . ANT-CABLE TEST 0.2-5-5.0 Sto p (MHz): 45.0 Sto p (MHz): 45. 3.0 Sta rt (MHz): 35. With the cursor on the Freq Field.0 Cable: USER Velocity: Est L ength: Retu rn Hold ft 0. Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting. Press the F5 ”Cable” Key to display the ANT-Cable Test Screen in Cable Mode.0 Type: DTF ft Fre q (MHz): 40 .8 Loss: 10.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30 1 2 41 20 29 dB 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 -50 . Press the F5 ”Marker” Key to display the ANT-Cable Test Screen in Marker Mode. MEASURING DTF (Distance to Fault) (cont) With the cursor on the Type Field. Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting. see Cover Page for details.0 Sta rt (MHz): 35. press the F1 “Edit” Key and use the  UP Key or  DOWN Key to select DTF.0 Retu rn Hold 408. press the F1 “Edit” Key and use the Number Keys to select the center frequency of the UUT.0 Cal Ma rker 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 0 9 0 Edit 4. ANT-CABLE TEST 0. 2-103 .0 0.8 Span (MHz): 10 .8 Cal 408.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30 1 2 41 20 29 dB 3 4 5 6 -50 .

Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting.0 Cable: RG-8x Velocity: Est L ength: Retu rn Hold ft 0.0 0. Then move the cursor to the Loss Field.8 Cal 408.0 0. select USER.2-5-5. Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting. Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting. .0 Cable: RG-8x Velocity: Est L ength: Retu rn Hold ft 0. see Cover Page for details. If Cable Type is not listed. MEASURING DTF (Distance to Fault) (cont) With the cursor on the Cable Field.8 Loss: 10.00 Unit Feet S cale 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 0 9 0 Edit 8.66 408.8 Loss: 10.00 Unit Feet S cale 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 0 9 0 Edit 7.66 408.00 Unit Feet S cale 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 0 9 0 Edit 2-104 Subject to Export Control.66 408.0 0.8 Cal 408. Press the F1 “Edit” Key and use the number keys to enter the Cable Loss per 100 ft. ANT-CABLE TEST 0. Press the F1 “Edit” Key and use the number keys to enter the Velocity Factor of the Cable. press the F1 “Edit” Key and use the  UP Key or  DOWN Key to select Cable Type used in the System Under Test.0 Cable: RG-8x Velocity: Est L ength: Retu rn Hold ft 0. ANT-CABLE TEST 0. 6.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30 1 2 41 20 29 dB 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 -50 . Move the cursor to the Velocity Field.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30 1 2 41 20 29 dB 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 -50 .8 Loss: 10.8 Cal 408.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30 1 2 41 20 29 dB 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 -50 . ANT-CABLE TEST 0.

00 2009-01-06 11:35:30 1 2 41 20 29 dB 3 4 5 6 -50 .8 Loss: 10. 2-105 . Subject to Export Control. press the F1 “Edit” Key and use the Number Keys to select the Estimated Cable Length.00 Unit Feet S cale 7 8 9 0 Edit 11.66 408. Allow at least two updates of the Graphical Display to insure data is valid. 9. (The Estimated Cable Length is the total Cable Length of the System Under Test plus 15%. ANT-CABLE TEST 0.0 0.2-5-5. MEASURING DTF (Distance to Fault) (cont) With the cursor on the Est Length Field. 12. Connect the System Under Test to the SWR Connector at the point of calibration.0 Cable: RG-8x Velocity: Est L ength: Retu rn Hold ft 0.0 Cable: RG-8x Velocity: Est L ength: Retu rn Hold ft 0.8 Loss: 10.66 408. press the F1 “Edit” Key to select Feet or Meters. The Graphical Display is updated approximately every 20 seconds. see Cover Page for details. ANT-CABLE TEST 0.8 Cal 408.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30 1 2 41 20 29 dB 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 -50 .8 Cal 408. With the cursor on the Unit Field.00 Unit Feet S cale 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 0 9 0 Edit 10.) Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting.0 0.

00 Cable 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 0 9 0 2-106 Subject to Export Control.00 Delt a 0. see Cover Page for details.0 0.00 Cable 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 0 9 0 15. Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting.00 Delt a 0. Press the F5 ”RF” Key to display the ANT-Cable Test Screen in RF Mode.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30 1 2 41 20 29 dB 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 -50 . 13. use the  UP Key or  DOWN Key to select a Marker.0 Marker: 1 Off Delta: 1 Move Left Right Edit Retu rn ft Pos: dB Hold 0.0 Marker: 1 On Delta: 1 Move Left Right Edit Retu rn ft Pos: dB Hold 0. .00 0.00 0. ANT-CABLE TEST 0.00 Cable 7 8 9 0 14. ANT-CABLE TEST 0. With the data displayed on the Graphical Display. With the cursor on the Marker Number Field.00 Cal 408.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30 1 2 41 20 29 dB 3 4 5 6 -50 .00 0.00 Cal 408. Press the F5 ”Marker” Key to display the ANT-Cable Test Screen in Marker Mode. MEASURING DTF (Distance to Fault) (cont) Press the F5 ”Scale” Key to display the ANT-Cable Test Screen in Scale Mode.0 Marker: 1 Off Delta: 1 Move Left Right Edit Retu rn ft Pos: dB Hold 0. Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting. press the F1 “Edit” Key and use the  UP Key or  DOWN Key to select On. the Markers are used to determine the DTF at any point across the Graphical Display.00 Cal 408. ANT-CABLE TEST 0.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30 1 2 41 20 29 dB 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 -50 .0 0.8 Delt a 0.8 Delt a 0. Move the cursor to the right.00 Delt a 0.8 Delt a 0.2-5-5.0 0.

The active Marker can be moved using the Peak/Move and Left Right Fields with the readings.8 Delt a 0. With the cursor on the Right Field. ANT-CABLE TEST 0.00 0. Subject to Export Control.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30 dB 1 2 41 20 29 3 4 -50 .0 0.0 0. corresponding to the Marker position. 16. Selecting “Move” moves the Marker to the next Data Point on the Graphical Display.2-5-5.0 Marker: 1 Off Delta: 1 Move Left Right Edit Retu rn ft Pos: dB Hold 0. displayed in fields under the Graphical Display.00 Cal 408.0 Marker: 1 Off Delta: 1 Move Left Right Edit Retu rn 1 ft Pos: dB Hold 0.00 Cal 408.00 Delt a 0. The Marker shown in the Marker Number Field is active. press the F1 “Enter” Key to move the Marker to the right on the Graphical Display. MEASURING DTF (Distance to Fault) (cont) With the cursor on the Peak/Move Field. ANT-CABLE TEST 0.8 Delt a 0. 2-107 . Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting. see Cover Page for details.00 Cable 5 6 7 8 9 0 NOTE: When first enabled. NOTE: Selecting “Peak” moves the Marker to the Next Peak on the Graphical Display. a Marker is at the far left of the Graphical Display.00 Delt a 0.00 Cable 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 0 9 0 17.00 0. press the F1 “Edit” Key and use the  UP Key or  DOWN Key to select Peak or Move.00 2009-01-06 11:35:30 1 2 41 20 29 dB 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 -50 . Up to three Markers may be placed on the Graphical Display at a time.

ANTENNA J2 DIRECTIONAL COUPLER J1 TRANSMITTER REVERSE J4 J3 FORWARD 10 dB PAD ANT CONNECTOR T/R CONNECTOR TEST SET 2. . TRANS MITTER TEST Recei ver More MH z: 40. 1. The Transmitter Test Screen should be displayed.00 000 0 Port : T/R Mod: FM 10k AFBW: No ne 41 20 29 Volume : Squel ch : Speake r: AudOu t: Save E dit 100 -50 dB m Audi o In Audi o In Reca ll Retu rn Ho l d Setu p 2-108 Subject to Export Control. MEASURING REVERSE POWER Connect the Directional Coupler in line between the Transmitter and Antenna and to the 3500 / 3500A.2-5-6. see Cover Page for details.

41 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 20 DTMF Decode DCS Decod e Audio Level 29 0 0 0 1 2 TX TEST SETUP Fgen Modulation Meter: RSSI Meter: RF Error Met er: Distortion Meter: SINAD Meter RF Power Meter AF Counter 1 7 8 1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 5 6 2 5 8 3 6 9 Return 7 8 4 7 9 0 9 0 Done Subject to Export Control. With the cursor on the RSSI Meter Field. TX TEST SETUP Fgen Modulation Meter: RSSI Meter: RF Error Met er: Distortion Meter: SINAD Meter RF Power Meter AF Counter 1 7 8 41 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 DTMF Decode DCS Decod e Audio Level 29 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 5 8 Edit 3 6 9 Return 4 7 9 0 5. 3. Press the F4 “Setup” Key to display the Transmitter Test Setup Screen. see Cover Page for details. 2-109 . Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting. TRANS MITTER TEST 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Receiver More MHz: 40.0 00 000 Port : T/ R Mod: FM 10k AFBW : No ne 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 9 0 4. press the F1 “Edit” Key and use the  UP Key or  DOWN Key to select the T/R Connector. press the F1 “Edit” Key and the Number Key for an open Meter position (refer to Meter Chart) to display the RSSI Meter in that position on the Transmitter Test Screen.2-5-6. MEASURING REVERSE POWER (cont) With the cursor on the Port (RF In) Field. Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting.

press the F1 “Edit” Key and use the  LEFT.  RIGHT and Number Keys to match the Transmit frequency of the UUT. MEASURING REVERSE POWER (cont) Press the F2 “Return” Key to display the Transmitter Test Screen. 6.00 000 0 Port : T/R Mod: FM 10k AFBW: No ne 41 20 29 RSSI 0. With the cursor on the RF MHz Field. see Cover Page for details. TRANS MITTER TEST 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Receiver More MHz: 40. press the F1 “Edit” Key and use the  UP Key or  DOWN Key to select the ANT Connector. 9. Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting.0 dBm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Volume : Squel ch : Speake r: AudOu t: Save E dit 100 -50 dB m Audi o In Audi o In Reca ll Retu rn Ho l d Setu p 7. With the cursor on the Port (RF In) Field. Press the F1 “Done” Key to save the setting. TRANS MITTER TEST Recei ver More MH z: 40.0 00 000 Port : Ant Mod: FM 10k AFBW : No ne 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 9 0 2-110 Subject to Export Control.2-5-6. Key the Transmitter and record the RSSI Meter reading. . TRANS MITTER TEST 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Receiver More MHz: 40.0 00 000 Port : T/ R Mod: FM 10k AFBW : No ne 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 9 0 8.

10.0 30. MEASURING REVERSE POWER (cont) Key the Transmitter and record the RSSI Meter reading. see Cover Page for details.5 20 56 92 128 164 200 Frequency (MHz ) Subject to Export Control. 11.2-5-6. 2-111 .5 30.001 Return Loss = REV PWR (dBm) . Calculate Forward and Reverse Power: FWD PWR (dBm) = T/R RSSI (dBm) + FWD Coupling REV PWR (dBm) = ANT RSSI (dBm) + REV Coupling + Coupler Insertion Loss Coupling (dB) 29.FWD PWR (dBm) + 10 dB I ns er t io n Lo s s (dB ) 0 0.25 0. Calculate Power in Watts and Return Loss: Power (Watts) = 10 (PWR (dBm)/10) * 0.5 20 56 92 128 164 200 Frequency (MHz ) 12.

the Calibration Values are not affected. NOTE: 7. however any saved Setup Files are deleted. 2-112 Subject to Export Control. 3. NOTE: LOADING SOFTWARE USING USB MEMORY DEVICE When loading Software into the 3500 / 3500A. 8. Allow several minutes for the PC to reboot from the CD-ROM. Connect the External DC Power Supply to the Test Set (DC IN Connector). When the software load is completed.53:07-May-09 2 0x1 0x62 0x93 0x1 00:50:31:09:03:32 301000106 Return This screen is a representation of the screen that appears. .2-5-7. verify the Software Version displayed on the Version Screen matches the Software Version loaded. Ensure the Test Set is ON. 1. Place the Software Loader CD-ROM into the PC and reboot the PC. Often the BIOS on the PC needs to reconfigured to boot from the CD-ROM. 6. VERSION CFM: PPC: FPGA: MFIO: RF: digital CPLD: RF CPLD: HW CPLD: MAC Address: SERIAL: 41 20 29 Release-3_7_1:01-APR-10 Release-3_7_1:01-APR-10 2. Connect the Comm Breakout Box to the Test Set REMOTE Connector. 5.0. Connect the Ethernet Crossover Cable from the Comm Breakout Box (ETHERNET Connector) to the PC (Ethernet Port). Connect the AC Power Cable from the External DC Power Supply to an appropriate AC power source. Follow the instructions displayed on the PC. 2. see Cover Page for details. 4.

Checking Unpacked Equipmen t Use the following steps for checking the equipment. Check the equipment against the packing slip to see if the shipment is complete. Avoid damaging the carton and packing material during equipment unpacking.CHAPTER 3 . Report all discrepancies. 3-1 . see Cover Page for details. Remove the 3500 / 3500A transit case from the protective plastic bag. 3-1-1.OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 3-1.       Cut and remove the sealing tape on the carton top and open the carton. Store the shipping carton for future use should the 3500 / 3500A need to be returned. Place protective plastic bag and end cap packing material inside shipping carton. SERVICE UPON RECEIPT SERVICE UPON RECEIPT OF MATERIAL Unpackin g Special-design packing material inside this shipping carton provides maximum protection for the 3500 / 3500A. A. Grasp the 3500 / 3500A transit case firmly. B. while restraining the shipping carton.   Inspect the equipment for damage incurred during shipment. Place the 3500 / 3500A transit case and end cap packing on a suitable flat. If the equipment has been damaged. clean and dry surface. Use the following steps for unpacking the 3500 / 3500A. report the damage. and lift the 3500 / 3500A transit case and packing material vertically. Subject to Export Control.

The internal battery is equipped to power the 3500 / 3500A for five hours of continuous use. The 3500 / 3500A can operate. Perform the Turn-On Procedure (para 2-4-1).3-1-2. shown in the BAT Field on most Test Screens. The 3500 / 3500A can operate continuously on AC power via the DC Power Supply. When charging. after which time. The Battery must be removed when conditions surrounding the 3500 / 3500A are <-20°C and >60°C) 3-2 Subject to Export Control. When the POWER Indicator is YELLOW. the battery reaches an 100% charge in approximately four hours. connected to an external DC source. the battery is at >25% capacity. The battery should be charged every three months (minimum) or disconnected for long term inactive storage periods of more than six months. for servicing and/or bench tests. see Cover Page for details. PRELIMINARY SERVICING AND ADJUSTMENT OF EQUIPMENT Remove the 3500 / 3500A from the Soft Carrying Case or Transit Case. the battery is at <25% capacity. Allow 20 minutes for the battery to charge when turning the 3500 / 3500A ON from a dead battery condition. When the POWER Indicator is GREEN. the 3500 / 3500A powers down automatically. BATTERY PRECAUTIONS The 3500 / 3500A is powered by an internal Lithium Ion battery pack. The battery charger operates whenever DC power (11 to 32 Vdc) is applied to the 3500 / 3500A with the supplied DC Power Supply or a suitable DC power source. . drops to 10 (10%). If the battery level. the 3500 / 3500A battery needs recharging. 2. outside the battery charging temperature range (5° to 45°C). The 3500 / 3500A is supplied with an external DC Power Supply that enables the operator to recharge the battery when connected to AC power. The internal battery charger allows the battery to charge between a temperature range of 5° to 45°C. 1.

If a malfunction is not listed or is not corrected by the listed corrective actions. The Troubleshooting Table lists the common malfunctions which may occur during operation of the 3500 / 3500A.3-2. nor all the tests or inspections and corrective actions. SYMPTOM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 DESCRIPTION External DC Power Supply failure POWER Indicator does not illuminate CHARGE Indicator does not illuminate FAULT Indicator is Red FAULT Indicator is Yellow Blows Fuse Battery does not charge Display is blank or abnormality exists in Display Display Contrast or Backlight cannot be adjusted Keys inoperable Self Test failure Connector failure PAGE 3-4 3-4 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-6 Subject to Export Control. see Cover Page for details. NOTE   This manual cannot list all the malfunctions that may occur. Perform the tests/inspections and corrective actions in the order listed. TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting is divided into a Symptom Index and a Troubleshooting Table. route the 3500 / 3500A to an authorized Maintenance Facility for repair. 3-3 .

replace the Battery (para 3-3-2). replace the External DC Power Supply. Using a DMM on the External DC Power Supply output. Connect the External DC Power Supply to a verifiable AC Power Source and verify the LED is lit. Step 3.1 Vdc Nominal at the Battery Connector (Red wire). . verify +18 Vdc (±1 Vdc). verify 12. Remove any external power sources from the 3500 / 3500A. replace the External DC Power Supply. Verify the Fuse is not blown.6 Vdc at the Battery Connector (Red wire). Using a DMM. 2 POWER Indicator does not illuminate Step 1. If incorrect.  If incorrect.  If incorrect. 3-4 Subject to Export Control.  If incorrect.  If incorrect. Connect the External DC Power Supply to a verifiable AC Power Source and verify the LED is lit. see Cover Page for details.  Step 2. Step 6. replace the External DC Power Supply. install the Battery (para 3-3-2). Connect the External DC Power Supply to the 3500 / 3500A. The tests or inspections and corrective actions should be performed in the order listed. Step 4. replace the Fuse (para 3-3-3).  Step 2. If incorrect. verify +18 Vdc (±1 Vdc). Failure to do so may result in troubleshooting recommendations that replace working items. verify 11. MALFUNCTION TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 1 External DC Power Supply failure Step 1.  If incorrect. Using a DMM on the External DC Power Supply output. refer to Troubleshooting (para 2-2) in the 3500 / 3500A Maintenance Manual. Using a DMM.  If incorrect.TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE NOTE The Troubleshooting Table lists common malfunctions found during normal operation of the 3500 / 3500A. Step 5. Verify the Battery is installed. replace the External DC Power Supply.

Step 5. verify 11.  Step 2. Connect the External DC Power Supply to a verifiable AC Power Source and verify the LED is lit. 5 FAULT Indicator is Yellow Step 1. replace the External DC Power Supply.  If FAULT Indicator is still Red. refer to Troubleshooting (para 2-2) in the 3500 / 3500A Maintenance Manual. verify +18 Vdc (±1 Vdc). 3-5 .  If incorrect. 4 FAULT Indicator is Red Step 1.TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE (cont) MALFUNCTION TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 3 CHARGE Indicator does not illuminate Step 1. Connect the External DC Power Supply to the 3500 / 3500A. Subject to Export Control. install the Battery (para 3-3-2).  If FAULT Indicator is still Yellow. Remove any external power sources from the 3500 / 3500A. refer to Troubleshooting (para 2-2) in the 3500 / 3500A Maintenance Manual. replace the Battery (para 3-3-2). Verify the Battery is installed. Step 3. Press the POWER Key twice to cycle power.  If incorrect. Clear Warning condition in the 3500 / 3500A.  If incorrect. Press the POWER Key twice to cycle power. Step 2. replace the External DC Power Supply.  If incorrect. Step 2. Using a DMM on the External DC Power Supply output. If incorrect. verify 12.6 Vdc at the Battery Connector (Red wire). Using a DMM. Step 4.  If incorrect. Verify the Fuse is not blown. see Cover Page for details. Clear Caution condition in the 3500 / 3500A. Step 6.1 Vdc Nominal at the Battery Connector (Red wire). refer to Troubleshooting (para 2-2) in the 3500 / 3500A Maintenance Manual. replace the Fuse (para 3-3-3). Using a DMM.

Check and/or adjust Contrast and Backlight levels. Using a DMM on the External DC Power Supply output. 11 Self Test failure Refer to Troubleshooting (para 2-2) in the 3500 / 3500A Maintenance Manual. Connect the External DC Power Supply to a verifiable AC Power Source and verify the LED is lit. 10 Keys inoperable Refer to Troubleshooting (para 2-2) in the 3500 / 3500A Maintenance Manual. . replace the Battery (para 3-3-2). 8 Display is blank or abnormality exists in Display Step 1. 7 Battery does not charge Step 1.TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE (cont) MALFUNCTION TEST OR INSPECTION CORRECTIVE ACTION 6 Blows Fuse Step 1. 9 Display Contrast or Backlight cannot be adjusted Refer to Troubleshooting (para 2-2) in the 3500 / 3500A Maintenance Manual.  If incorrect. Step 2. see Cover Page for details. Refer to Troubleshooting (para 2-2) in the 3500 / 3500A Maintenance Manual. 3-6 Subject to Export Control. replace the External DC Power Supply. Replace the Fuse (para 3-3-3). Allow four hours for Battery to fully charge and verify the CHARGE Indicator is Green. Refer to Troubleshooting (para 2-2) in the 3500 / 3500A Maintenance Manual. If incorrect.  Step 2. replace the External DC Power Supply. Connect the External DC Power Supply to the 3500 / 3500A and verify the CHARGE Indicator is Green or Yellow. Press the POWER Key. 12 Connector failure Inspect connector for damage and/or wear. refer to Troubleshooting (para 2-2) in the 3500 / 3500A Maintenance Manual. replace the Battery (para 3-3-2). Step 3. If incorrect.  If incorrect.  Step 2. verify +18 Vdc (±1 Vdc).  If the Fuse continues to blow.

3-3-1. the Battery needs recharging. Connect the AC Power Cable to the External DC Power Supply and an appropriate AC power source. Verify the CHARGE Indicator is YELLOW. refer to Troubleshooting (para 3-2). WARNING Do not recharge the Lithium Ion Battery Pack outside the 3500 / 3500A. The battery charger operates whenever DC power (11 to 32 Vdc) is applied to the 3500 / 3500A with the supplied External DC Power Supply or a suitable DC power source. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES BATTERY RECHARGING The Battery is equipped to power the 3500 / 3500A for five hours of continuous use. see Cover Page for details. The Battery should be charged every three months (minimum) or disconnected for long term inactive storage periods of more than six months.3-3. refer to Troubleshooting (para 3-2). The Battery must be removed when conditions surrounding the 3500 / 3500A are <-20°C or >60°C). If the CHARGE Indicator is YELLOW and/or the Battery fails to accept a charge and the 3500 / 3500A does not operate on Battery power. Allow 20 minutes for battery to charge when turning 3500 / 3500A ON from a dead battery condition. after which time. The internal battery charger allows the Battery to charge between a temperature range of 5°C to 40°C. 4. DC POWER SUPPLY DC POWER SUPPLY (3500) (3500A) YELLOW (CHARGING) GREEN (CHARGED) 3500 YELLOW (CHARGING) GREEN (CHARGED) ABC 3500A DEF GHI JKL MNO PQR STU VWX YZ ± 062-001b Subject to Export Control. Performing the Steps above in order shown helps to avoid the inadvertent turning OFF of 3500 / 3500A when External DC Power Supply is connected. This is a design behavior to prevent damage to the lithium batteries. DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to recharge the Battery in 3500 / 3500A with an External DC Power Supply. 1. When charging. If the CHARGE Indicator is RED. 3-7 . 3. Allow four hours for Battery charge or until the CHARGE Indicator is GREEN. the Battery reaches an 100% charge in approximately four hours. 2. Connect the External DC Power Supply to the DC IN Connector on the 3500 / 3500A. NOTE: The 3500 / 3500A may turn OFF whenever the External DC Power Supply (connected to AC power) is plugged into 3500 / 3500A.

3-8 Subject to Export Control. 2. DO NOT CRUSH. Fully loosen five captive screws holding the Battery Cover to the 3500 / 3500A and remove the Battery Cover from the 3500 / 3500A. see Cover Page for details. DO NOT SHORT CIRCUIT OR FORCE DISCHARGE OF THE LITHIUM ION BATTERY PACK AS THIS MIGHT CAUSE THE LITHIUM ION BATTERY PACK TO VENT. REMOVE 1. Fully loosen the captive screws (on each side of the bumper) in the two lower bumpers and remove the bumpers from the 3500 / 3500A. CAUTION REPLACE ONLY WITH THE BATTERY SPECIFIED. WARNING • • DISPOSE OF THE LITHIUM ION BATTERY PACK ACCORDING TO LOCAL STANDARD SAFETY PROCEDURES.3-3-2. OVERHEAT OR EXPLODE. INCINERATE OR DISPOSE OF THE LITHIUM ION BATTERY PACK IN NORMAL WASTE. . BATTERY REPLACEMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to replace the Battery in the 3500 / 3500A. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO INSTALL A NON-RECHARGEABLE BATTERY.

Subject to Export Control.). 2. 3-9 .3-3-2. BATTERY REPLACEMENT (cont) Disconnect the Battery Wire Harness and remove the Battery from the 3500 / 3500A. REMOVE (cont) INSTALL 1. Install the Battery in the 3500 / 3500A and connect the Battery Wire Harness. 3. Install the Battery Cover on the 3500 / 3500A and tighten five captive screws (8 in/lbs. see Cover Page for details.

INSTALL (cont) 3-10 Subject to Export Control. 3. BATTERY REPLACEMENT (cont) Install the two lower bumpers on the 3500 / 3500A and tighten the captive screws (on each side of the bumpers) (8 in/lbs.). see Cover Page for details.3-3-2. .

Fully loosen the captive screws (on each side of the bumper) in the two lower bumpers and remove the bumpers from the 3500 / 3500A. 32 Vdc. CAUTION FOR CONTINUOUS PROTECTION AGAINST FIRE. Fully loosen five captive screws holding the Battery Cover to the 3500 / 3500A and remove the Battery Cover from the 3500 / 3500A. see Cover Page for details.3-3-3. Type F . 3-11 .Mini Blade Fuse) REMOVE 1. 2. Subject to Export Control. (5 A. REPLACE ONLY WITH FUSES OF THE SPECIFIED VOLTAGE AND CURRENT RATINGS. FUSE REPLACEMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to replace the internal fuse in the 3500 / 3500A.

see Cover Page for details. 3. .3-3-3. FUSE REPLACEMENT (cont) Locate and remove the Fuse. 3-12 Subject to Export Control. REMOVE (cont) INSTALL 1. Install the Fuse.

3-13 .3-3-3.). see Cover Page for details. INSTALL (cont) 3.). Subject to Export Control. Install the two lower bumpers on the 3500 / 3500A and tighten the captive screws (on each side of the bumpers) (8 in/lbs. 2. FUSE REPLACEMENT (cont) Install the Battery Cover on the 3500 / 3500A and tighten five captive screws (8 in/lbs.

2. HANDLE REPLACEMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to replace the handle(s) on the 3500 / 3500A.3-3-4. see Cover Page for details. REMOVE 1. . 3-14 Subject to Export Control. Fully loosen the captive screws (on each side of the bumper) in the two bumpers (on the right or left side of the 3500 / 3500A) and remove the bumpers from the 3500 / 3500A. Remove the four shoulder bolts securing the Handle to the 3500 / 3500A and remove the Handle.

Subject to Export Control.). see Cover Page for details. 3-15 .3-3-4. INSTALL 2.). HANDLE REPLACEMENT (cont) Install the Handle and the four shoulder bolts (8 in/lbs. Install the two bumpers (on the right or left side of the 3500 / 3500A) and tighten the captive screws (on each side of the bumper) (8 in/lbs. 1.

3-3-5.). . 3-16 Subject to Export Control. REMOVE Fully loosen the captive screws on each side of the bumper and remove the bumper from the 3500 / 3500A. BUMPER REPLACEMENT DESCRIPTION This procedure is used to replace the bumper(s) on the 3500 / 3500A. INSTALL Install the bumper on the 3500 / 3500A and tighten the captive screws (on each side of the bumpers) (8 in/lbs. see Cover Page for details.

. The following environmental conditions apply to both shipping and storage: Temperature: .. <2 g Shock: ...... B......... En vironmen t The 3500 / 3500A should be stored in a clean.............................. dry environment...................... In high humidity environments........ Mark “FRAGILE” on the top........ protect the 3500 / 3500A from temperature variations that could cause internal condensation.......................................................... A........ Use a double-wall cardboard shipping container........................................................................ 0 to 4600 m Vibration: ........ 3-17 ..........................3-4. <30 g * The Battery must not be subjected to temperatures <-20°C or >+60°C............... use the following guidelines:      Wrap the 3500 / 3500A transit case in plastic packing material........ Protect all sides with shock-absorbing material to prevent the 3500 / 3500A transit case from moving within the container..................... see Cover Page for details............ When using packing materials other than the original..... PREPARATION FOR STORAGE OR SHIPMENT Packag in g Package the 3500 / 3500A in the original shipping container......... -30°C to +71°C* Relative Humidity: ............... Subject to Export Control.... 0% to 95% Altitude: ........................ bottom and all sides of the shipping container........................................ Seal the shipping container with approved sealing tape.....................

. 3-18 Subject to Export Control. see Cover Page for details.T H I S P A G E I N T E N T I ON A L L Y L E F T B L A N K .

CHAPTER 4 . GENERAL There are four Options that are currently available to be installed in the 3500 / 3500A: • • • • • Spectrum Analyzer (35000010) Oscilloscope (35000001) Tracking Generator (35000070) P25 (35000100) Scripting (35000060) The Options that are installed in the 3500 / 3500A are displayed on the Options Screen. OPTIONS Install Stat us: Unique ID: 35000010 35000001 35000070 35000100 35000060 41 Installed 820902c346237d0d Scope Analyzer Trackgen P25 Scripts 20 29 Never Expires Never Expires Never Expires Never Expires Never Expires Return Inst all This screen is a representation of the screen that appears. 4-1 . see Cover Page for details. Refer to para 2-2-5F for a description of the Options Screen features and functions.OPTIONS 4-1. Subject to Export Control.

Press the POWER Key to turn the 3500 / 3500A OFF. The USB Memory Device LED starts to flash when the Option files are loading. Press the POWER Key again to turn the 3500 / 3500A ON. 8. Press the F5 “Install” Key. Insert the USB Memory Device in the USB Connector on the Comm Breakout Box. (Sample Screen) OPTIONS Install Status: Unique ID: 41 Installed 820902c346237d0d 20 29 5. 6. The 3500 / 3500A recognizes the USB Memory Device and the USB LED flashes momentarily. Press the 6 Key to display the Options Screen. 1. When the System Menu is displayed. INSTALLING OPTIONS Attach the Comm Breakout Box to the REMOTE Connector. 7.” 4-2 Subject to Export Control. When the Option files are installed. 4. . Verify the Options are displayed on the Options Screen. then the Option files are not installed. 2.4-2. (Sample Screen) OPTIONS Install Status: Unique ID: 35000010 35000001 35000070 35000100 35000060 41 Installed 820902c346237d0d Scope Analyzer Trackgen P25 Scripts Never Expires Never Expires Never Expires Never Expires Never Expires 20 29 Return Install Return Install (Before Option Install) (After Option Install) INSTALL TROUBLESHOOTING Incorrect Unit ID Number and Serial Number Option files are created for a specific Unique ID (Unit ID) Number and Serial Number in each 3500 / 3500A. remove the USB Memory Device. The “Install Status” Indicator provides messages indicating when the Option load is completed. 3. the Option Install fails and the “Install Status” indicates “Not For Me. To the right of the displayed Option is the Option expiration date. If the Option installation is attempted for a different unit other than the unit the Option Files were created for. see Cover Page for details. press the F5 “Util” Key to display the Utilities Menu. Allow approximately one minute for the Options files to load.

In swept IF Spectrum Analyzers the RBW is defined by analog filters. SPECTRUM ANALYZER OPTION (35000010) The Spectrum Analyzer Option (35000010) adds a Spectrum Analyzer to the testing compatibilities of the 3500 / 3500A. The FFT Spectrum Analyzer operates differently then a swept IF Spectrum Analyzer.4-3. The Spectrum Analyzer provides users with the ability to view and measure RF. 4-3 .” The FFT Spectrum Analyzer takes the RBW and uses this same concept to the extreme. with 1024 bins on every sweep. The large number of FFT bins increases the measurement sensitivity. The 3500 / 3500A Spectrum Analyzer is a FFT Spectrum Analyzer. The number of possible positions that the filter can be moved to are called “bins. On many communications test sets. with the more narrow the filter the longer the incoming signal takes to stabilize in the filter. see Cover Page for details. 300 z is as small as possible. Subject to Export Control.

000000 Port: T/R Mod: FM 10k AFBW: NONE Volume: Squelch: Speaker: AudOut: Save Edit 100 -50 dBm Audio In Audio In Recall Return Hold Setup To access the Spectrum Analyzer Screen on the Duplex or Transmitter Test Screens: ● ● Press the  LEFT Key or  RIGHT Key to move the on-screen cursor to the Spectrum Analyzer frame.583 Preamp Off -70 49.0 Hold Norm 50.DUPLEX TEST .ANALYZER ANALYZER 20 29 RBWe(Hz) 9244. SPECTRUM ANALYZER SCREEN When the System Menu displayed. 41 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 DTMF Decode DCS Decode Audio Level Spectrum Analyzer 29 0 0 0 3 41 20 29 Analyzer TX TEST SETUP Fgen Modulation Meter: RSSI Meter: RF Error Met er: Distortion Meter: SINAD Meter RF Power Meter AF Counter 1 4 7 Edit 2 5 8 3 6 9 Return TRANSMITTER TEST Receiver More MH z: 40.4-3-1. press the appropriate Number Key to display the Spectrum Analyzer Screen. 41 -10 1 2 3 4 5 6 .5 Port: T/R Vscale: 10 Marker Freq (MHz): 50.AUDIO . Press the F1 “Zoom” Key to display the Spectrum Analyzer Screen.792 dBm Pbw(dBm) -99.000000 Preamp: On Meters System Selftest Util Edit Return The Spectrum Analyzer Screen can also be added to the Duplex and Transmitter Test Screens for easy access. 4-4 Subject to Export Control.RECEIVER TEST . .5 MHz Span: 1 MHz Ref Lvl: -10. see Cover Page for details.TRANSMITTER TEST .ANT-CABLE TEST .

000000 Preamp: On Edit Return Norm SCREEN FEATURE RBWe(Hz) Pbw(dBm) Freq (MHz) FUNCTION Displays the equivalent resolution bandwidth.5 MHz Span: 1 MHz Ref Lvl: -10.4-3-2. Select: -90. Select: ANT or T/R Vscale Used to adjust the vertical scale of the major divisions on the Spectrum Analyzer Screen. Select: 10 kHz.000000 MHz in 0.000001 MHz increments Preamp Used to select the Preamp for an additional gain of 20 dB.5 Port: T/R Vscale: 10 Marker Freq (MHz): 50. SPECTRUM ANALYZER SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS ANALYZER -10 RBWe(Hz) 9244.0 to 10. Range: 2.583 Preamp Off -70 41 20 29 49. 100 kHz. see Cover Page for details. 5. 4-5 . 20 kHz. 1 MHz.0 Hold (Control Mode) 50. 2 MHz or 5 MHz Ref Lvl Used to select the Reference Level on the Spectrum Analyzer.792 dBm Pbw(dBm) -99.000000 to 1000. Select: On or Off Span Used to select the Frequency Span adjustment to control the bandwidth of the displayed frequency. 50 kHz. 15 or 20 (dB) Subject to Export Control. Used to select the Spectrum Analyzer center frequency. 200 kHz. 10. 500 kHz. Select: 2.1 dB increments Port Used to select the signal input connector. Displays the total power inside the power bandwidth markers.0 dBm in 0.

Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Spectrum Analyzer Screen to Control Mode. Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen. Used to perform the Frequency Find function. Ends the Field Edit. . Freezes the screen. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Saves the test screen. SPECTRUM ANALYZER SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (cont) FUNCTION Edit Done Next Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. see Cover Page for details. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Spectrum Analyzer Screen to Power Bandwidth Mode. readings and settings. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Instruction pop-ups are displayed to normalize the Spectrum Analyzer. F2 “Norm” / “Save” Norm Save 4-6 Subject to Export Control. including configurations. Restores the screen to active mode. Instruction pop-ups are displayed to normalize the Spectrum Analyzer. Aborts the normalize sequence. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Spectrum Analyzer Screen to Marker Mode. SCREEN FEATURE F1 “Edit” / “Done” / “Next” F2 “Return” / “Save” Return Save F3 “Hold” / “Resume” / “Find” Hold Resume Find F4 “Norm” / “Abort” Norm Abort F5 “Control” / “Marker” / “PBw” / “Esc” Control Marker PBw Esc Edit Norm Hold Marker Return (when accessed from the Mini-Meter) SCREEN FEATURE F1 “Edit” / “Done” / “Next” FUNCTION Edit Done Next Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections.4-3-2. Displays the next pop-up screen. Displays the next pop-up screen.

Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Spectrum Analyzer Screen to Power Bandwidth Mode. Ends the Field Edit. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. Closes the Spectrum Analyzer Screen and returns to the Test Screen. SPECTRUM ANALYZER SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (cont) FUNCTION Hold Resume Find Freezes the screen. Used to perform the Frequency Find function. SCREEN FEATURE F3 “Hold” / “Resume” / “Find” F4 “Control” / “Marker” / “PBw” Control Marker PBw F5 “Return” / “Esc” Return Esc Subject to Export Control.4-3-2. 4-7 . Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Spectrum Analyzer Screen to Control Mode. Restores the screen to active mode. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Spectrum Analyzer Screen to Marker Mode. see Cover Page for details.

5 Off Left MHz Freq: 2. 4-8 Subject to Export Control. Range: 2. Select: 1 or 2 Marker Status Freq Used to set the Marker selected to ON or OFF.0000 MHz Right Ampl: --Hold (Marker Mode) 50. .4-3-2. Displays the Delta in Frequency or Distance between the Active Marker selected in the Marker Field and the Marker selected in the Delta Field. Used to select and enable one of two markers on the Graphical Display. see Cover Page for details. Used to select the Spectrum Analyzer center frequency.5 Delta: --Delta: --Norm PBw Return SCREEN FEATURE RBWe(Hz) Pbw(dBm) Marker FUNCTION Displays the equivalent resolution bandwidth.792 dBm Pbw(dBm) -99. Displays the signal amplitude. Min or Move Move/Min/Max Left Right Ampl Delta (Bottom) Used to move the Active Marker selected in the Marker Field to the left or to the right on the Graphical Display.583 Preamp Off -70 Marker: 1 Max Edit 41 20 29 49.0000 MHz in 0.0001 MHz increments Delta (Top) Displays the Delta in SWR/Return Loss between the Active Marker selected in the Marker Field and the Marker selected in the Delta Field. Used to move the Active Marker on the Graphical Display.0000 to 1000. Displays the total power inside the power bandwidth markers. Select: Max. SPECTRUM ANALYZER SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (cont) ANALYZER -10 RBWe(Hz) 9244.

Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Spectrum Analyzer Screen to Power Bandwidth Mode. Freezes the screen. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. SPECTRUM ANALYZER SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (cont) FUNCTION Edit Done Next Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Freezes the screen. Instruction pop-ups are displayed to normalize the Spectrum Analyzer. F2 “Norm” / “Save” Norm Save F3 “Hold” / “Resume” Hold Resume Subject to Export Control.4-3-2. including configurations. Displays the next pop-up screen. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Spectrum Analyzer Screen to Marker Mode. Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen. 4-9 . see Cover Page for details. Aborts the normalize sequence. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. SCREEN FEATURE F1 “Edit” / “Done” / “Next” F2 “Return” / “Save” Return Save F3 “Hold” / “Resume” Hold Resume F4 “Norm” / “Abort” Norm Abort F5 “Control” / “Marker” / “PBw” / “Esc” Control Marker PBw Esc Edit Norm Hold PBw Return (when accessed from the Mini-Meter) SCREEN FEATURE F1 “Edit” / “Done” / “Next” FUNCTION Edit Done Next Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Instruction pop-ups are displayed to normalize the Spectrum Analyzer. Restores the screen to active mode. readings and settings. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Spectrum Analyzer Screen to Control Mode. Ends the Field Edit. Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Saves the test screen. Displays the next pop-up screen. Restores the screen to active mode. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value.

see Cover Page for details. . Ends the Field Edit. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Spectrum Analyzer Screen to Marker Mode. SPECTRUM ANALYZER SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (cont) FUNCTION Control Marker PBw Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Spectrum Analyzer Screen to Control Mode. SCREEN FEATURE F4 “Control” / “Marker” / “PBw” F5 “Return” / “Esc” Return Esc 4-10 Subject to Export Control.4-3-2. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. Closes the Spectrum Analyzer Screen and returns to the Test Screen. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Spectrum Analyzer Screen to Power Bandwidth Mode.

2 kHz. Select: -2. 200 kHz. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. 100 kHz.792 dBm Pbw(dBm) -99. Used to adjust the Marker Offset on the Spectrum Analyzer Screen.500000 in 0. SPECTRUM ANALYZER SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (cont) ANALYZER -10 RBWe(Hz) 9244. 500 kHz. Displays the next pop-up screen. see Cover Page for details.4-3-2.5 Offset: 0. 50 kHz. 10 kHz. 5 kHz. Select: 1 kHz.500000 to 2. Displays the total power inside the power bandwidth markers. Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Saves the test screen. Select: Hanning (for signals close together) Flat Top (for measuring power of a signal) Peak Hold Used to select the Preamp for an additional gain of 20 dB. Select: On or Off Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. 4-11 .000000 Peak Hold: On Edit Return Control (Power Bandwidth Mode) SCREEN FEATURE RBWe(Hz) Pbw(dBm) Offset FUNCTION Displays the equivalent resolution bandwidth. 1 MHz.5 MHz Pwr Bw: 100 kHz Hold RBW: FlatTop Norm 50.583 Preamp Off -70 41 20 29 49. 20 kHz.000001 increments Pwr Bw Used to select the Marker Bandwidth. F1 “Edit” / “Done” / “Next” Edit Done Next F2 “Return” / “Save” Return Save Subject to Export Control. 2 MHz or 5 MHz RBW Used to select the FFT Window.

see Cover Page for details. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Spectrum Analyzer Screen to Marker Mode. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Spectrum Analyzer Screen to Power Bandwidth Mode. SPECTRUM ANALYZER SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (cont) FUNCTION Hold Resume Freezes the screen. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Spectrum Analyzer Screen to Marker Mode. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Spectrum Analyzer Screen to Power Bandwidth Mode. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. F2 “Norm” / “Save” Norm Save F3 “Hold” / “Resume” Hold Resume F4 “Control” / “Marker” / “PBw” Control Marker PBw 4-12 Subject to Export Control. Instruction pop-ups are displayed to normalize the Spectrum Analyzer. Displays the next pop-up screen. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Spectrum Analyzer Screen to Control Mode. including configurations. SCREEN FEATURE F3 “Hold” / “Resume” F4 “Norm” / “Abort” Norm Abort F5 “Control” / “Marker” / “PBw” / “Esc” Control Marker PBw Esc Edit Norm Hold Control Return (when accessed from the Mini-Meter) SCREEN FEATURE F1 “Edit” / “Done” / “Next” FUNCTION Edit Done Next Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. Ends the Field Edit. Restores the screen to active mode.4-3-2. . Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Spectrum Analyzer Screen to Control Mode. Freezes the screen. Instruction pop-ups are displayed to normalize the Spectrum Analyzer. Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen. Restores the screen to active mode. readings and settings. Aborts the normalize sequence.

but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. see Cover Page for details. 4-13 . SPECTRUM ANALYZER SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (cont) FUNCTION Return Esc Closes the Spectrum Analyzer Screen and returns to the Test Screen. Ends the Field Edit.4-3-2. SCREEN FEATURE F5 “Return” / “Esc” Subject to Export Control.

.T H I S P A G E I N T E N T I ON A L L Y L E F T B L A N K . see Cover Page for details. 4-14 Subject to Export Control.

Transmitter and Audio Function Generator Test Screens for easy access.00 V Zero Hold Trigger The Oscilloscope Screen can also be added to the Duplex.OSCILLOSCOPE -3.0 mS 5.DUPLEX TEST .0 H z 150. Subject to Export Control.RECEIVER TEST . OSCILLOSCOPE SCREEN When the System Menu is displayed. Transmitter and Audio Function Generator Test Screens: ● ● Press the  LEFT Key or  RIGHT Key to move the on-screen cursor to the Oscilloscope frame. 4-4-1. The Oscilloscope provides users with the ability to perform time dependent measurement analysis.0 Source: Audio In Load: 150 Meters System Selftest Util Edit Return Vert: 1 V/Div Horiz: 0.000000 Port: T/R Level: -70 dBm Ext Attn dB: 0 Modulator Gen 1: On Gen 2: On MIC: On Ext Aud: Off Volume: Squelch: Speaker: AudOut: Save Edit Freq 1000.TRANSMITTER TEST .25 kH z 6.25 kH z Load: High Z 100 -50 dBm Audio In Audio In Recall Return Hold Setup To access the Oscilloscope on the Duplex.25 kH z 3. press the appropriate Number Key to display the Oscilloscope Screen.00 1 2 3 4 5 .4-4.00 0.5 mSec/Div Vert Offset: 0. OSCILLOSCOPE OPTION (35000001) The Oscilloscope Option (35000001) adds an Oscilloscope to the testing compatibilities of the 3500 / 3500A. 41 20 29 41 20 AF Scope 29 Audio In RECEIVER TEST SETUP SINAD Meter Distortion Meter: AF Counter Audio Level AF Scope 0 0 0 0 3 RECEIVER TEST Generator Off MH z: 40.0 H z 1 4 7 Edit 2 5 8 3 6 9 Return FM Group 6. 41 20 29 OSCILLOSCOPE 3. Press the F1 “Zoom” Key to display the Oscilloscope Screen or use the  DOWN Key to access the Oscilloscope Mini-Meter Source Field. Receiver. 4-15 . see Cover Page for details.AUDIO AC V > 7 . Receiver.ANT-CABLE TEST .

see Cover Page for details. . 1K (3500A only).0 mS 5. 10 mSec/Div. OSCILLOSCOPE SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS OSCILLOSCOPE 3.00 0. 2 V/Div.5 sequence (Demod FM) Horiz Used to select the Horizontal Scale of the Oscilloscope. 600.1 V/Div. 2 mSec/Div.5 V/Div. DVM or Demod (Transmitter Test Screen) In or DVM (Audio Function Generator Screen) When the Source Field is set to DVM.4-4-2. 20 mV/Div. 6 mSec/Div.1 kHz/Div to 50 kHz/Div in 1.5 mSec/Div Vert Offset: 0. Div10 (3500A only) or High Z Field is displayed only when Source Field is set to Audio In.5 mSec/Div. Select: 0. Select: 150.2 V/Div. 0. Select: Audio Audio Audio Audio In. 50 mV/Div. 50 mSec/Div or 0. 1 V/Div.0 Source: Audio In Load: 150 Edit Return Vert: 1 V/Div Horiz: 0. 20%/Div or 50%/Div (Demod AM) 0. 0. 20 mSec/Div. DVM or Demod (Duplex Test Screen) In or DVM (Receiver Test Screen) In. Vert Used to select the Vertical Scale of the Oscilloscope.2. 1 mSec/Div.1 Sec/Div Load Used to select the Audio input signal load (Ω). the Coupling Field can be set to AC or DC. 10%/Div. 4-16 Subject to Export Control. Select: 10 mV/Div. 5 V/Div or 10 V/Div 5%/Div. 0.00 41 20 29 V > AC -3.00 V Zero Hold (Control Mode) Trigger SCREEN FEATURE Source FUNCTION Used to select the signal source. 4 mSec/Div.

Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. 4-17 . Select: -100. Field is displayed only when Source Field is set to DVM. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Oscilloscope Screen to Control Mode.01 V increments -100% to +100% in 0.01% increments (Demod AM) -100.4-4-2. including configurations. OSCILLOSCOPE SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (cont) FUNCTION Used to select the Vertical Offset of the Oscilloscope. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. F3 “Hold” / “Resume” Subject to Export Control. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Oscilloscope Screen to Marker Mode.01 kHz increments (Demod FM) SCREEN FEATURE Vert Offset Zero Used to remove the DC offset from the DVM signal source. see Cover Page for details. F2 “Save” Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen. Ends the Field Edit.00 to +100. F2 “Return” / “Save” Return Save F3 “Hold” / “Resume” Hold Resume F5 “Control” / “Marker” / “Trigger” / “Esc” Control Marker Trigger Esc Edit Hold Trigger Return (when accessed from the Mini-Meter) SCREEN FEATURE F1 “Edit” / “Done” FUNCTION Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. Restores the screen to active mode. readings and settings. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Oscilloscope Screen to Trigger Mode.00 V in 0. including configurations. Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen. Hold Resume Freezes the screen.00 to +100. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. F1 “Edit” / “Done” Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Restores the screen to active mode. Freezes the screen.00 kHz in 0. readings and settings.

4-4-2.

OSCILLOSCOPE SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (cont)
FUNCTION Control Marker Trigger Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Oscilloscope Screen to Control Mode. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Oscilloscope Screen to Marker Mode. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Oscilloscope Screen to Trigger Mode. Closes the Oscilloscope Screen and returns to the Test Screen. Ends the Field Edit, but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value.

SCREEN FEATURE F4 “Control” / “Marker” / “Trigger”

F5 “Return” / “Esc”

Return Esc

4-18

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

4-4-2.

OSCILLOSCOPE SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (cont)
OSCILLOSCOPE 3.00 41 20 29

> V gggg

AC

-3.00

0.0 Auto 1.000 Return V

mS Trigger Edge: Hold
(Trigger Mode)

5.0 Falling Marker

Trigger Type: Trigger Level: Edit

SCREEN FEATURE Trigger Type

FUNCTION Used to select the Trigger Type. Select: Auto or Norm

Trigger Level

Used to adjust the Trigger position. The Trigger level is compared to the input signal to determine if the sweep should occur. Select: -100.00 to +100.00 V in 0.01 V increments -100% to +100% in 0.01% increments (Demod AM) -100.00 to +100.00 kHz in 0.01 kHz increments (Demod FM)

Trigger Edge

Used to select the Trigger Edge. When the signal is compared to the Trigger level, the slope of the signal determines if the Trigger occurs. Select: Rising or Falling Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen, including configurations, readings and settings. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time.

F1 “Edit” / “Done”

Edit Done

F2 “Return” / “Save”

Return Save

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

4-19

4-4-2.

OSCILLOSCOPE SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (cont)
FUNCTION Hold Resume Freezes the screen. Restores the screen to active mode. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Oscilloscope Screen to Control Mode. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Oscilloscope Screen to Marker Mode. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Oscilloscope Screen to Trigger Mode. Ends the Field Edit, but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value.

SCREEN FEATURE F3 “Hold” / “Resume”

F5 “Control” / “Marker” / “Trigger” / “Esc”

Control Marker Trigger Esc

Edit

Hold

Marker

Return

(when accessed from the Mini-Meter)

SCREEN FEATURE F1 “Edit” / “Done”

FUNCTION Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value.

F2 “Save”

Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen, including configurations, readings and settings. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. Hold Resume Freezes the screen. Restores the screen to active mode. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Oscilloscope Screen to Control Mode. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Oscilloscope Screen to Marker Mode. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Oscilloscope Screen to Trigger Mode. Closes the Oscilloscope Screen and returns to the Test Screen. Ends the Field Edit, but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value.

F3 “Hold” / “Resume”

F4 “Control” / “Marker” / “Trigger”

Control Marker Trigger

F5 “Return” / “Esc”

Return Esc

4-20

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

4-4-2.

OSCILLOSCOPE SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (cont)
OSCILLOSCOPE 3.00 41 20 29

> V gggg

1

2

AC

-3.00

0.0 Left Offset: 1.51 mSec Right Hold

mS Marker 1: -1.00 V Marker 2: 1.00 V

5.0

Off Move Edit

Return

Control

(Marker Mode)

SCREEN FEATURE Markers

FUNCTION Used to display the Markers. When Marker 1 or Marker 2 is displayed, then the movement controls (Move, Left and Right) are active for the Markers. Select: Off, Marker 1 or Marker 2

Offset Move

Displays the Marker Delta in time. Used to move the Marker in different time stop steps. Select: Move x10, Move x50 or Peak

Left

Used to move the position of the selected Marker to the left. When selected, press the F1 “Enter” Key to move the selected Marker to the left the increment selected in the Move field.

Right

Used to move the position of the selected Marker to the right. When selected, press the F1 “Enter” Key to move the selected Marker to the right the increment selected in the Move field.

Marker 1 Marker 2 F1 “Edit” / “Enter” / Done”

Displays the level of Marker 1. Displays the level of Marker 2. Edit Enter Done Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Moves the Marker the increment selected in the Move field. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value.

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

4-21

4-4-2.

OSCILLOSCOPE SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (cont)
FUNCTION Return Save Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen, including configurations, readings and settings. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. Freezes the screen. Restores the screen to active mode. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Oscilloscope Screen to Control Mode. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Oscilloscope Screen to Marker Mode. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Oscilloscope Screen to Trigger Mode. Ends the Field Edit, but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value.

SCREEN FEATURE F2 “Return” / “Save”

F3 “Hold” / “Resume”

Hold Resume

F5 “Control” / “Marker” / “Trigger” / “Esc”

Control Marker Trigger Esc

Edit

Hold

Control

Return

(when accessed from the Mini-Meter)

SCREEN FEATURE F1 “Edit” / “Done”

FUNCTION Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value.

F2 “Save”

Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen, including configurations, readings and settings. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. Hold Resume Freezes the screen. Restores the screen to active mode. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Oscilloscope Screen to Control Mode. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Oscilloscope Screen to Marker Mode. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Oscilloscope Screen to Trigger Mode. Closes the Oscilloscope Screen and returns to the Test Screen. Ends the Field Edit, but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value.

F3 “Hold” / “Resume”

F4 “Control” / “Marker” / “Trigger”

Control Marker Trigger

F5 “Return” / “Esc”

Return Esc

4-22

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

TRACKING GENERATOR OPTION (35000070) The Tracking Generator Option (35000070) adds a Tracking Generator to the testing compatibilities of the 3500 / 3500A. see Cover Page for details.AUDIO dB 8 .0 RF in: ANT Set Ref Mode Control Meters System Selftest Util Edit Subject to Export Control.TRACK GEN -110 Gen Lvl: Ref Lvl: -5 10 491. 4-5-1. press the appropriate Number Key to display the Tracking Generator Screen. 41 20 29 TRACKING GENERATOR 10 1 2 3 4 5 .DUPLEX TEST .TRANSMITTER TEST . TRACKING GENERATOR SCREEN When the System Menu is displayed. 4-23 .RECEIVER TEST . The Tracking Generator provides users with the ability to generate a carrier wave that is applied to components or systems. which allows the output to be analyzed to evaluate the frequency response of the device under test.0 dBm Preamp: Return Off MHz Type: Live Scale: 20 Hold 511.ANT-CABLE TEST .4-5.

5. Select: 2. 15 or 20 Set Ref Mode F1 “Edit” / “Done” Used to set the Reference level. Edit Done Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Select: Ant or T/R Ref Lvl Used to select the top of screen reference level. 10. Select: Type Used to select the display type.0 dBm Preamp: Return Off MHz Type: Live Scale: 20 Hold (RF Mode) 511. 4-24 Subject to Export Control.4-5-2. Select: -65 to -5 dBm in 1 dB increments 1 2 5 . see Cover Page for details. Used to select the dB/Div of the vertical axis. 3 4 μV i n 1 d B i n c r e me n t s d B m o r μV d B m / μV Used to select the units of measure for the Tracking Generator level. 7 4 t o 1 2 5 7 4 3 . Select: -70 to 10 dBm in 10 dB increments Preamp Scale Used to set preamp operation ON or OFF. . Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. TRACKING GENERATOR SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS TRACKING GENERATOR 10 41 20 29 dB -110 Gen Lvl: Ref Lvl: Edit -5 10 491.0 RF in: Ant Set Ref Mode Control SCREEN FEATURE Gen Lvl FUNCTION Used to select the Tracking Generator output level. Select: Diff or Live RF in Used to select the Tracking Generator input connector.

4-5-2. readings and settings. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. TRACKING GENERATOR SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (cont) FUNCTION Return Save Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Tracking Generator Screen to Marker Mode. see Cover Page for details. 4-25 . Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Tracking Generator Screen to RF Mode. including configurations. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Tracking Generator Screen to Control Mode. Ends the Field Edit. Freezes the screen. Restores the screen to active mode. SCREEN FEATURE F2 “Return” / “Save” F3 “Hold” / “Resume” Hold Resume F5 “Control” / “Marker” / “RF” / “Esc” Control Marker RF Esc Subject to Export Control.

0 501. Select: 2 to 1000 MHz in 0. including configurations. Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen. 20 kHz. 100 kHz. 2 MHz. Select: 10 kHz. 50 kHz. Select: 2 to 1000 MHz in 0. Freezes the screen. 50 MHz.000001 MHz increments (floating) Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. 1 MHz.000000 491.0 Marker SCREEN FEATURE Freq (MHz) FUNCTION Used to select the Tracking Generator frequency. 200 MHz.4-5-2. F1 “Edit” / “Done” Edit Done F2 “Return” / “Save” Return Save F3 “Hold” / “Resume” Hold Resume 4-26 Subject to Export Control. . TRACKING GENERATOR SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (cont) TRACKING GENERATOR 10 41 20 29 dB -110 Freq (MHz): Start (MHz): Edit 491. Select: 2 to 1000 MHz in 0. 20 MHz.000001 MHz increments (floating) Stop (MHz) Used to select/display the Stop Frequency. The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. Restores the screen to active mode.000001 MHz increments (floating) Span (MHz) Used to select the frequency span. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. 200 kHz. 10 MHz. 500 kHz. 500 MHz or 998 MHz Start (MHz) Used to select/display the Start Frequency. 100 MHz. readings and settings. 5 MHz.000000 Return MHz Span (MHz): 20 MHz Stop (MHz): 511.000000 Hold (Control Mode) 511. see Cover Page for details.

Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Tracking Generator Screen to Marker Mode. see Cover Page for details. Ends the Field Edit. 4-27 . Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Tracking Generator Screen to RF Mode. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value.4-5-2. TRACKING GENERATOR SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (cont) FUNCTION Control Marker RF Esc Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Tracking Generator Screen to Control Mode. SCREEN FEATURE F5 “Control” / “Marker” / “RF” / “Esc” Subject to Export Control.

0 MHz 141.0 Marker 1: -60.2 dBm Marker 2: RF Off Position: Left Right Return SCREEN FEATURE Marker FUNCTION Used to select and enable one of two markers on the Graphical Display.47 Hold (Marker Mode) 175.01 increments Marker 1 Move/Min/Max Displays the vertical axis of Marker 1 in dBm. Used to move the Active Marker on the Graphical Display. see Cover Page for details. Select: 1 or 2 Marker Status Position Used to set the Marker selected to On or Off. Edit Enter Done Highlights the selected field to be changed or changes the field value if the field only contains two selections. Select: Move. Ends the Field Edit and saves the new setting / value. Select: 2. Moves the Marker the increment selected in the Move field.4-5-2. . Displays the Horizontal Axis of the Active Marker.00 in 0. TRACKING GENERATOR SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (cont) TRACKING GENERATOR 10 41 20 29 dB 1 -80 Marker: 1 Move Edit 125. Displays the vertical axis of Marker 2 dBm. Max or Min Left Right Marker 2 F1 “Edit” / “Enter” / Done” Used with the F1 “Enter” Key to move the Active Marker selected in the Marker Field to the left or to the right on the Graphical Display. Also used to manually set the location of the Active Marker. 4-28 Subject to Export Control.00 to 1000.

Restores the screen to active mode. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Tracking Generator Screen to Marker Mode. TRACKING GENERATOR SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (cont) FUNCTION Return Save Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2) Performs a data dump of frames displayed on the screen.4-5-2. Freezes the screen. SCREEN FEATURE F2 “Return” / “Save” F3 “Hold” / “Resume” Hold Resume F5 “Control” / “Marker” / “RF” / “Esc” Control Marker RF Esc Subject to Export Control. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Tracking Generator Screen to RF Mode. Used to change the displayed fields and functionality on the Tracking Generator Screen to Control Mode. readings and settings. see Cover Page for details. but does NOT save any changes to the setting or value. 4-29 . The data dump is stored in a time-stamped ASCII report and can be retrieved at a later time. Ends the Field Edit. including configurations.

T H I S P A G E I N T E N T I ON A L L Y L E F T B L A N K . 4-30 Subject to Export Control. . see Cover Page for details.

0 H z FM Group 6.25 kH z Load: High Z P25 Demod BER Sig Pwr Mod Fidly Deviation Hold Setup More --------- 100 -50 dBm Audio In Audio In Recall Return PTT on To access the P25 Mini Meter fields on the Duplex and Transmitter Test Screens: ● ● Press the  LEFT Key or  RIGHT Key to move the on-screen cursor to the P25 Demod frame. 4-6-1. The P25 Test Pattern field can also be accessed in the modulation frame on the Duplex and Transmitter Test Screens: DUPLEX TEST Generator Off MH z: 40. Press the  UP Key or  DOWN Key to move the on-screen cursor from one field to another.3k HP 20 29 DUPLEX TEST SETUP Modulation Meter RSSI Meter RF Error Met er RF Power Meter SINAD Meter Distortion Meter AF Counter DTMF Decode 1 4 7 Edit 2 5 8 3 6 9 Return DUPLEX TEST Generator Off MH z: 40. P25 TEST OPTION (35000100) The P25 Test Option (35000100) adds P25 testing protocols to the testing compatibilities of the 3500 / 3500A.0 H z 150.25 kH z 3.000000 Port: T/R Level: -70 dBm Ext Attn dB: 0 Modulator Pattern: 1011 NAC: 293 41 Receiver More MH z: 40.4-6.25 kH z 6. see Cover Page for details. 4-31 . The P25 Test Option provides users with the ability to test P25 radio systems. 41 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 DCS Decode Audio Level P25 Receive 29 0 0 9 41 Receiver More MH z: 40. P25 MINI METER The P25 Mini Meter can be added to the Duplex and Transmitter Test Screens.000000 Port: T/R Level: -70 dBm Ext Attn dB: 0 Modulator Gen 1: On Gen 2: On MIC: On Ext Aud: Off Volume: Squelch: Speaker: AudOut: Save Edit Freq 1000.000000 Port: T/R Mod: FM 10k AFBW: 0.3k HP P25 Group 20 29 Volume: Squelch: Speaker: AudOut: Save Edit 100 -50 dBm Audio In Audio In Recall Return Hold P25 Demod BER Sig Pwr Mod Fidly Deviation Setup More --------- PTT on Subject to Export Control.000000 Port: T/R Mod: FM 10k AFBW: 0.

Select: 153. . 1011 or CAL NAC Used to set the network access code. Displays the symbol deviation accuracy of a P25 symbol.Reset Acq SCREEN FEATURE BER Freq Err Mod Fidly Deviation Sig Pwr Pattern FUNCTION Displays the incoming P25 symbol data compared to a standard pattern in determining errors in signal processing. Used to set the data or voice pattern generated by the Test Set. see Cover Page for details. P25 MINI METER FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS P25 Demod BER Freq Err Mod Fidly Deviation More --------- P25 Demod More Sig Pwr --Pattern 1011 NAC . Displays the P25 waveform modulation fidelity. Displays the frequency error of the transmitted signal.. Displays the RF level at the input connector.4-6-2. 4-32 Subject to Export Control. Select: 000 to FFF Reset Acq Used to reacquire the input signal.

4-7-1.HW CONFIG .AF COUNTER . SCRIPTING OPTION (35000060) The Scripting Option (35000060) adds Scripting to the testing compatibilities of the 3500 / 3500A. Scripting provides users with the ability to create and define test scripts.RECEI VER TEST .DIAGNOSTIC 3 . see Cover Page for details.CALIBRATION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 .OPTIONS .SELFTEST 2 . Meters Menu.VERSION .AUDIO 1 2 3 4 . Self Test Menu and Utilities Menu.DATE AND TIME .DISTORTION .SINAD .DUPLEX TEST .TRANSMITTER TEST .4-7.USB MANAGER .ANNUNCIATOR . When the Scripting Option is installed. SCRIPTS SCREEN Refer to Appendix C for the 3500 / 3500A RCI commands. 1 2 3 4 5 . 4-33 .UNIT COPY Scripts Meters System Selftest Util Scripts Meters System Selftest Util Subject to Export Control.AUDIO LEVEL METER Scripts Meters System Selftest Util Scripts Meters System Selftest Util 1 .REMOTE . the F1 “Scripts” Key is displayed on the System Menu. Press the F1 “Scripts” Key to display the Scripts Screen.ANT-CABLE TEST .

Radio Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Test 4 System Pag Up Pag Dn (Sample Scripts shown for display purposes only.Radio 2 . see Cover Page for details.) SCREEN FEATURE Scripts FUNCTION Displays the Scripts stored in the 3500 / 3500A. Displays the previous screen of Scripts if more than nine Scripts are loaded into the 3500 / 3500A. Displays the next screen of Scripts if more than nine Scripts are loaded into the 3500 / 3500A. 4-34 Subject to Export Control. Order of Scripts and Scripts Names are defined by the user. SCRIPTS SCREEN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS Page 1 1 .Radio 4 . F2 “System” F4 “Pag Up” F5 “Pag Dn” Displays the System Menu (para 2-2-2).4-7-2. .Radio 3 .

2. 4-35 . see Cover Page for details.4-7-3. 3. Configure the 3500 / 3500A Remote Screen to match the remote settings of the PC. Access the TelNet server on the PC. 4. 1. REMOTE Config Port: IP: Subnet Mask: Gateway: Ethernet Port : Ethernet Type: Port Currently Act ive: 41 20 ETHERNET 10 10 10 193 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9991 STANDARD USB 29 Edit 5. Return Config Set the Port Currently Active field to USB and the Ethernet Type field to DEV to allow for interactive development with the Scripting language. REMOTE Config Port: IP: Subnet Mask: Gateway: Ethernet Port : Ethernet Type: Port Currently Act ive: 41 20 ETHERNET 10 10 10 193 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9991 DEV USB 29 Edit Return Config Subject to Export Control. Connect USB Cable between the PC and the 3500 / 3500A USB Connector on the Comm Breakout Box. TRANSFER SCRIPTS TO THE 3500 / 3500A Attach the Comm Breakout Box to the REMOTE Connector.

TRANSFER SCRIPTS TO THE 3500 / 3500A (cont) On the USB-Manager Screen.4-7-3. see Cover Page for details. . USB-MANAGER All Screen Settings Screenshots Report File Scripts 41 20 29 Erase from unit Erase from unit Status: Ready Ent er Return Save Recall 4-36 Subject to Export Control. Scripts can be saved and recalled to/from the USB Memory Device. 6.

10. see Cover Page for details. Subject to Export Control.4-7-4. 4-37 . Used to copy all the Script files to the cloned unit. COPY SCRIPTS WITH UNIT COPY SCREEN When the Unit Copy Screen is displayed.193 10 10 10 193 20 29 All Screen Settings Clear and Copy All Screen Settings Copy Script Clear and Copy Script Copy Edit Return SCREEN FEATURE Script Clear and Copy Script Copy FUNCTION Used to copy all the Script files to the cloned unit after all the Script files have been deleted from the cloned unit. 10. two selections are available for copying Scripts into the cloned unit: UNIT COPY Unit IP addr: Target IP addr: Status: Ready 41 10.

see Cover Page for details. Closes a previously opened dialog box. all Lua commands must end with a “. The PPC RS-232 uses a fixed setting of 115200N81. . size :scripting:meter:clear “RCI screen command” 4-38 Subject to Export Control. COMMAND :scripting:dialog:create DESCRIPTION Opens a dialog box. The command can be any available scripting or Lua command.y coordinates on the dialog box.5 > “Lua command” :scripting:event:idle :scripting:sleep <ms> :scripting:alarm <ms> :scripting:entry:idle xpos.Y_VAL. Provides a waiting mechanism so the script blocks waiting for some user keypad action. Prints the given string to the given x.” (semicolon) when writing scripts. This command does not automatically return the user to the Scripts Screen.4-7-5. Causes the 3500 / 3500A enunciator to sound for 0 to 1000 milliseconds (ms). Old screen data is not saved so when the dialog box is closed. Causes the script interpreter to pause for the supplied number of milliseconds (ms).ini file. closes. "DONE" returns the inputted data. GENERAL SCRIPTING COMMANDS In Scripting. The screen may also need to be set to defaults before the screen is displayed properly. Prints the described quoted string in the desired soft key position. ypos. In addition. Blanks all soft key positions. “string” :scripting:screen :scripting:exit :scripting:event:enable < 1 . "ESC" returns an empty string. When this command completes. the sleep is truncated to 1 minute. Signals the end of a running script so that other scripts may then be run. all RCI commands start with a “:” (colon). Size is the number of characters to be read (1 to 16). “string” :scripting:softkey:clear :scripting:log:print “string” :scripting:screen:print X_VAL. the dialog block. There are a few special commands that start with a “*” (star). Returns to the Scripts Screen. For time >1 minute. Causes the script to fill the find screen path and resets the custom. Example: screen_transmitter_test :scripting:dialog:close :scripting:softkey:label < 1 to 5 >. if open. Create a box on a dialog screen for the user to input data and creates two soft keys (“ESC” and "DONE"). the script must ensure the dialog box is set to a valid screen. Provides a way to print diagnostic messages to the console via PPC RS-232. Sets the event for the given soft key to be the given Lua command. The xpos and ypos are screen coordinates that denotes the top left corner of the entry box.

4-39 . see Cover Page for details. SCRIPTING FLOWCHARTS AUDIO fgen1 :fgen:freq *<*> :fgen:state *<*> Fgen A fgen2 :fgen:freq *<*> :fgen:state *<*> Ext*Aud *In :extaudin:state *<*> B Subject to Export Control.4-7-6.

SCRIPTING FLOWCHARTS (cont) AUDIO (cont) A B Speaker :speaker:source*<*> :speaker:state*<*> Ext*Aud *In :extaudout:source*<*> :extaudout:state*<*> SINAD :sinad:fgen:state*<*> :sinad:fgen:reading:avg? SINAD :sinad:extaudin:state*<*> :sinad:extaudin:reading:avg? Distortion :distortion:fgen:state*<*> :distortion:fgen:reading:avg? Distortion :distortion:extaudin:state*<*> :distortion:extaudin:reading:avg? AF*Counter :afctr:source*<*> :afctr:state *<*> :afctr:reading:val? 4-40 Subject to Export Control.4-7-6. see Cover Page for details. .

4-7-6. 4-41 . see Cover Page for details. SCRIPTING FLOWCHARTS (cont) RECEIVER Gen1 :upconverter:fgen1:state*<*> :upconverter:fgen1:freq*<*> :upconverter:fgen1:fm*<*> Gen2 :upconverter:fgen2:state*<*> :upconverter:fgen2:freq*<*> :upconverter:fgen2:fm*<*> :upconverter:mod_inhibit*<*> Upconv erter :upconverter:type*<*> :upconverter:carrier_state*<*> A DCS :upconverter:dcs:state*<*> :upconverter:dcs:am*<*> :upconverter:dcs:fm*<*> Mic :upconverter:mic:state*<*> :upconverter:mic:am*<*> :upconverter:mic:fm*<*> ANT T/R A RF*Generator :gen:freq *<*> :gen:lvl:dbm*<*> :gen:port *<*> SWR :gen:port:protection*<*> Subject to Export Control.

see Cover Page for details. SCRIPTING FLOWCHARTS (cont) TRANSMITTER fgen1 :fgen:freq *<*> :fgen:state *<*> Fgen A fgen2 :fgen:freq *<*> :fgen:state *<*> Ext*Aud *In :extaudin:state *<*> B 4-42 Subject to Export Control. .4-7-6.

SCRIPTING FLOWCHARTS (cont) TRANSMITTER (cont) A B Speaker D :speaker:source*<*> :speaker:state*<*> Ext*Aud *In :extaudout:source*<*> :extaudout:state*<*> SINAD :sinad:fgen:state*<*> :sinad:fgen:reading:avg? SINAD :sinad:extaudin:state*<*> :sinad:extaudin:reading:avg? SINAD :sinad:demod:state*<*> :sinad:demod:reading:avg? Distortion :distortion:fgen:state*<*> :distortion:fgen:reading:avg? Distortion :distortion:extaudin:state*<*> :distortion:extaudin:reading:avg? Distortion :distortion:demod:state*<*> :distortion:demod:reading:avg? AF*Counter :afctr:source*<*> :afctr:state*<*> :afctr:reading:val? Subject to Export Control. 4-43 . see Cover Page for details.4-7-6.

.4-7-6. see Cover Page for details. SCRIPTING FLOWCHARTS (cont) TRANSMITTER (cont) ANT :rec:port:protection*<*> RF*AMP RF*Receiv er :rec:port *<*> :rec:rfamp_mode *<*> :rec:freq *<*> :rec:ifbw*<*> C T/R RF*Pow er :rfpow:reading:val? C Dow n *Conv erter :demod:type *<*> :demod:afbw*<*> Demod D RF*Error :rferr:reading:val? Modulation *Meter :devmod:reading:peak2peak? RSSI :rssi:reading:val? 4-44 Subject to Export Control.

5 mm CIRCULAR (2. T a b l e 3 f o r 3 5 0 0 A U D I O C o n n e c t o r d e s c ri p t i o n REMOTE 44-Pin D-SUB Female MIXED INPUT/OUTPUT R e f e r t o A p p e n d i x A . 5.CONNECTOR PIN-OUT TABLES A-1.5 mm center. center positive) SIGNAL TYPE INPUT/OUTPUT INPUT/OUTPUT INPUT/OUTPUT OUTPUT INPUT AUDIO 12-Pin CIRCULAR Female MIXED INPUT/OUTPUT R e f e r t o A p p e n d i x A . see Cover Page for details. 3500 I/O Connectors Subject to Export Control. T a b l e 5 f o r 3 5 0 0 R E M O T E C o n n e c t o r d e s c ri p t i o n Table A-1.APPENDIX A .5 mm outer diameter. A-1 . I/O CONNECTORS 3500 ANT T/R DC IN AUDIO SWR REMOTE 062-005 CONNECTOR ANT T/R SWR DC IN TYPE TNC Female TNC Female TNC Female 2.

I/O CONNECTORS (cont) 3500A ANT T/R DC AUDIO SWR DVM AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT REMOTE 062-005 CONNECTOR ANT T/R SWR DC IN TYPE TNC Female TNC Female TNC Female 2. 3500A I/O Connectors INPUT INPUT OUTPUT A-2 Subject to Export Control. . see Cover Page for details.5 mm outer diameter.5 mm CIRCULAR (2.A-1.5 mm center. center positive) SIGNAL TYPE INPUT/OUTPUT INPUT/OUTPUT INPUT/OUTPUT OUTPUT INPUT AUDIO 6-Pin CIRCULAR Female MIXED INPUT/OUTPUT R e f e r t o A p p e n d i x A . 5. T a b l e 4 f o r 3 5 0 0 A A U D I O C o n n e c t o r d e s c ri p t i o n REMOTE 44-Pin D-SUB Female MIXED INPUT/OUTPUT R e f e r t o A p p e n d i x A . T a b l e 6 f o r 3 5 0 0 A R E M O T E C o n n e c t o r d e s c ri p t i o n DVM AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT BNC Female BNC Female BNC Female Table A-2.

A-3 . AUDIO CONNECTOR PIN-OUT TABLE 3500 8 7 6 5 12 9 10 11 4 3 1 2 062-004 PIN NO. see Cover Page for details.A-2. 3500 AUDIO Connector Pin-Out Table Subject to Export Control. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SIGNAL NAME PTT AMP_SW MIC GND A U D I O _I N GND DVM+ DVMA UD I O_ O U T GND SPKR+ SP KR- Table A-3.

. 3500A AUDIO Connector Pin-Out Table A-4 Subject to Export Control. AUDIO CONNECTOR PIN-OUT TABLE (cont) 3500A A B C F E D PIN NO. A B C D E F SIGNAL NAME GND SPEAKER+ PTT MI C MI C S E L 1 MI C S E L 2 Table A-4.A-2. see Cover Page for details.

A-5 . 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 SIGNAL NAME GND CF_ETD+ GND PPC_CTS PPC_TXD A2 REM_OUT2 REM_OUT4 VBUS_DN1 GND_DN1 VBUS_UP GND_UP GND CF0RX GND CF_ERX+ GND A1 REM_OUT1 AUDIOOUTFLEXBUFFER AUDIOINFLEXBUFFER GND Table A-5. see Cover Page for details. 3500 REMOTE Connector Pin-Out Table Subject to Export Control.A-3. REMOTE CONNECTOR PIN-OUT TABLE 3500 31 44 16 30 1 15 062-003 PIN NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 SIGNAL NAME VBUS_DN1 GND_DN1 VBUS_UP GND_UP GND CF0RTS GND CF_ERXCF_ETDGND PPC_RTS PPC_RXD B1 A4 REM_OUT3 H_DH_D+ D_DD_D+ GND CF0TX CF0CTS PIN NO.

3500A REMOTE Connector Pin-Out Table A-6 Subject to Export Control. 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 SIGN A L N A ME GN D C F_ ETD + GN D PPC _ C TS PPC _ TXD R EM_ IN 2 R EM_ OU T2 R EM_ OU T4 VBU S_ D N 1 GN D _ D N 1 +5 Vd c J-TAG SEN SE GN D C F0 R X GN D C F_ ER X+ GN D R EM_ IN 1 R EM_ OU T1 TD O TD I GN D Table A-6. REMOTE CONNECTOR PIN-OUT TABLE (cont) 3500A 31 16 1 44 30 15 PIN N O.A-3. see Cover Page for details. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 SIGN A L N A ME VBU S_ D N 1 GN D _ D N 1 +5 Vd c J-TAG SEN SE GN D C F0 R TS GN D C F_ ER XC F_ ETD GN D PPC _ R TS PPC _ R XD R EM_ IN 4 R EM_ IN 3 R EM_ OU T3 H_DH_D+ TN S TC K GN D C F0 TX C F0 C TS PIN N O. .

min mm MOD Month.APPENDIX B . IF IN In/lbs. EMC EMI Err ESC Est For Example … Electromagnetic Compatibility Electromagnetic Interference Error Escape Estimated F F FH Fgen FM FPGA FREQ Female Frequency Hop Function Generator Frequency Modulation Field Programmable Gate Array Frequency Gen GHz G Generate 9 Gigahertz (10 Hertz) H H HI HP Hr HW Hz Hour High High-Pass Hour Hardware Hertz I ID i.ABBREVIATIONS A A AC AF AFBW AM ANT Assy ATTN Aud Amperes Alternating Current Audio Frequency Audio Frequency Bandwidth Amplitude Modulation Antenna Assembly Attenuation Audio B Bat Batt BER BNC BP BW Battery Battery Bit Error Rate Bayonet Neill-Concelman Bandpass Bandwidth C C CAL CD CFM Config CPLD CW Celsius or Centigrade Calibrate/Calibration Compact Disk (CD-ROM) Coldfire Firmware Configure/Configuration Complex Processing Logic Device Continuous Wave D D dB dBc dBm DC DCS Demod DEV DIST DTF DVM Day Decibel Decibels below Carrier Decibels above one Milliwatt Direct Current Digitally Coded Squelch Demodulation Deviation Distortion Distance to Fault Digital Voltmeter E e. Minutes or Male Multi-Function I/O 6 Megahertz (10 Hertz) Microphone Minimum or Minutes -3 Millimeter (10 Meters) Modulation N N/A NORM Not Applicable Normal or Normalize O OUT Ovr Output Overload P para PC PCB PPC ppm PTT Pwr Paragraph Printed Circuit Printed Circuit Board PowerPC Parts per Million Push to Talk Power 3 Subject to Export Control. B-1 .e. m MFIO MHz MIC MIN.g. Meters. I/O Identification That is … Intermediate Frequency Input or Inch Inch/Pounds Input/Output K kHz Kilohertz (10 Hertz) L LCD LO LP Lvl Liquid Crystal Display Low Low-Pass Level M M.. see Cover Page for details.

. Alternating Current Volts. see Cover Page for details. Direct Current Very High Frequency Volume Volta Peak Volts Root Mean Square Voltage Standing Wave Ratio W W Watt Y Y Year B-2 Subject to Export Control.R REC RF RSSI RX Receive Radio Frequency Received Signal Strength Indication Receive S SWR Standing Wave Ratio T TDM Tem Temp TNC T/R TX Time-Division Multiplexing Temperature Temperature Threaded Neill-Concelman Transmit/Receive Transmit U USB UUT Universal Serial Bus Unit Under Test V V VAC Vdc VHF Vol Vp Vrms VSWR Volt Volts.

All commands and data are printable ASCII characters. The Breakout Box allows connection to an Ethernet or RS-232 external source. The commands that are written to the 3500 / 3500A must be terminated with a Carriage Return/Line Feed and EOI asserted on the last byte. GENERAL The 3500 / 3500A can be controlled through a serial interface. see Cover Page for details. REMOTE OPERATION CONNECTION Connect the Breakout Box (REMOTE Connector) to the 3500 / 3500A REMOTE Connector. All commands must be terminated in some manner. C-1 .REMOTE OPERATION C-1.APPENDIX C . Commands can be entered in lowercase. Subject to Export Control. uppercase or a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters. C-2.

C-3-1. select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).C-3. see Cover Page for details.’ C-2 Subject to Export Control. REMOTE OPERATION CONFIGURATION The 3500 / 3500A can be configured for remote operation using an Ethernet or RS-232 connection. CONFIGURATION FOR ETHERNET This is an example configuration for a static address on the PC utilizing two Ethernet cables and a Fast Ethernet Switch. 1. On the PC. . Both configurations require the Breakout Box is installed on the 3500 / 3500A (para C-2) and a PC is installed utilizing the proper cables. Select ‘Properties.

Connect one Ethernet Cable to the Fast Ethernet Switch (Connector 1) and to the Ethernet Connector on the Breakout Box. Connect the other Ethernet Cable to the Fast Ethernet Switch (Connector 2) and to the Ethernet Connector on the PC. 2. CONFIGURATION FOR ETHERNET (cont) Select ‘Use the following IP address’ and set the IP Address to “ 10 10 10 1 ” and the Subnet Mask to “ 255 255 255 0. Ethernet Cable to Breakout Box on 3500 / 3500A Ethernet Cable to PC Subject to Export Control.” 3.C-3-1. C-3 . see Cover Page for details.” Select “OK.

. C-4 Subject to Export Control.) Set the IP (Address) to “ 10 10 10 193 ” and the Subnet Mask to “ 255 255 255 0.C-3-1.’ 6. Ping the IP address of the 3500 / 3500A ( 10 10 10 193 ) to test the connection.” Press the “Config” F5 Key to re-establish the 3500 / 3500A to the new screen settings. Open remote program (PuTTY) and set the IP Address to “ 10 10 10 193 ” Select ‘Terminal.” Ensure the ‘Port Currently Active’ field is set to “Ethernet. 4. see Cover Page for details. CONFIGURATION FOR ETHERNET (cont) Access the 3500 / 3500A Remote Setup Screen and select the Ethernet selection. (Refer to para 2-2-7A for the Remote Setup Screen Field settings. REMOTE Config Port: IP: Subnet Mask: Gateway: Ethernet Port: Ethernet Type: Port Currently Act ive: 41 20 ETHERNET 10 10 10 193 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 9991 STANDARD ETHERNET 29 Edit Return Config 5. Open the ‘Command Shell” on the PC and ping the IP address of the PC ( 10 10 10 1 ) to test the connection.

see Cover Page for details. Remote commands can now be issued to the 3500 / 3500A. The Remote Window is displayed on the PC. 7.” 8.C-3-1. Subject to Export Control. CONFIGURATION FOR ETHERNET (cont) Set the fields as shown and select “Open. C-5 .

” C-6 Subject to Export Control. see Cover Page for details.) Select the settings shown and ensure the ‘Port Currently Active’ field is set to “RS-232.” Press the “Config” F5 Key to re-establish the 3500 / 3500A to the new screen settings. . (Refer to para 2-2-7A for the Remote Setup Screen Field settings. REMOTE Config Port: RS-232 Baud: RS-232 Parity: RS-232 #Data: RS-232 #Stop: RS-232 Flow: RS-232 Echo: Port Currently Active: 41 RS-232 115200 None 8 1 XON/OFF On RS-232 20 29 Edit Return Config 3. CONFIGURATION FOR RS-232 Connect RS-232 Cable to the RS-232 Connector on the Breakout Box and to the RS-232 Connector on the PC. open HyperTerminal and create a new connection. 2. Access the 3500 / 3500A Remote Setup Screen and select the RS-232 selection. Select “OK. 1.C-3-2. On the PC.

C-3-2. 4.” Select “OK.” ‘Data bits’ to “8. Set ‘Bits per Second’ to “115200.” 5.” ‘Parity’ to “None.” Subject to Export Control. Select “OK. see Cover Page for details. CONFIGURATION FOR RS-232 (cont) Select “COM2. C-7 .” ‘Stop bits’ to “1” and ‘Flow control’ to “Xon/Xoff.

. see Cover Page for details. Remote commands can now be issued to the 3500 / 3500A. 6. CONFIGURATION FOR RS-232 (cont) The Remote Window is displayed on the PC. C-8 Subject to Export Control.C-3-2.

1 Hz 0 .1 Hz 2 . Sets Alarm low limit state.Auto 1 .0 Hz 0. Clears AF Counter reading.0 Hz 0. :afctr:source? :afctr:state :afctr:state? Returns signal source to count. AF Counter autorange state. Returns Alarm high limit state.C-4. Counter autorange state to Manual. Returns AF Counter state.FGEN_2_AFCOUNTER Returns Sets AF Sets AF Returns AF Counter range information.0 Hz 1 .DEMOD_2_AFCOUNTER 2 . Returns AF Counter reading averaged value. Returns AF Counter reading maximum value.0 to 20000.0 to 20000.0 1 to 99 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 None 300 Hz LPF 3 kHz LPF 5 kHz LPF 15 kHz LPF CMESS BPF CCITT BPF 300 Hz HPF 300 to 3000 Hz BPF 300 to 5000 Hz BPF . Returns Alarm low limit state. REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) AF Counter COMMAND :afctr:alarm:high:limit :afctr:alarm:high:limit? :afctr:alarm:high:state :afctr:alarm:high:state? :afctr:alarm:low:limit :afctr:alarm:low:limit? :afctr:alarm:low:state :afctr:alarm:low:state? :afctr:average :afctr:average? :afctr:filter RANGE 15.0 DESCRIPTION Sets Alarm high limit value.0 to 20000. Returns number of readings to average. Sets Alarm low limit value. Sets input filter type. Sets number of readings to average. Sets resolution for the reading.MODULATION_2_ AFCOUNTER 3 . Sets Alarm high limit state. see Cover Page for details. Sets signal source to count.Manual -Waiting Update 0. Activates AF Counter.0 Hz 0. Returns AF Counter reading minimum value.0.EXT_AUD_IN_2_ AFCOUNTER 1 .0 to 20000. C-9 . Returns Alarm low limit value. Subject to Export Control.Manual 2 . Returns Alarm high limit value.0 to 20000. Counter autorange state to Auto. 15. Returns AF Counter reading with no statistics.300 to 20000 Hz BPF :afctr:range? :afctr:range:auto :afctr:range:manual :afctr:range:state? :afctr:reading:avg? :afctr:reading:clear :afctr:reading:max? :afctr:reading:min? :afctr:reading:val? :afctr:resolution :afctr:source 0 .0 to 20000.

C-10 Subject to Export Control. Sets Receiver input preamp state.ON DESCRIPTION Sets AGC Mode. AGC REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) COMMAND :agc:mode :agc:mode? :agc:rfamp_mode RANGE 0 . Sets Top of Scale adjustment for Manual AGC Mode. Activates Receiver AGC. Returns Top of Scale adjustment for Manual AGC Mode.Auto 1 . .Manual 1 . :agc:rfamp_mode? :agc:state :agc:state? :agc:tos :agc:tos? -90. Returns AGC Mode. Returns Receiver AGC state.0 dBm Returns Receiver input preamp state.Auto 0 .C-4. see Cover Page for details.0 to 10.OFF 2 .

No Overload 1 . Sets Audio Level autorange state to Manual.0 to 50.Manual 2 . Sets Alarm low limit value. :alm:range:mv:auto :alm:range:mv:manual :alm:range:mv:range? :alm:range:mv:state? 0 .0 to 50. Returns Audio Level autorange state.0 1 to 99 0 . Returns the average size.Waiting Update Sets Audio Level autorange state to Auto. Returns Audio Level range information. Returns overload status of DVM Connector. Sets Audio Level autorange state to Manual. Returns Audio Level autorange state.Waiting Update :alm:range:dbm:auto :alm:range:dbm:manual :alm:range:dbm:range? :alm:range:dbm:state? 0 .Manual . see Cover Page for details.Manual .Waiting Update Sets Audio Level autorange state to Auto. 0 . Sets Audio Level autorange state to Manual. Sets Alarm high limit state. 0.Auto 1 . Sets Audio Level autorange state to Manual.Auto 1 .Waiting Update Sets Audio Level autorange state to Auto. Subject to Export Control. Returns Alarm low limit value. Returns Alarm high limit state. Sets Alarm low limit state.0 DESCRIPTION Sets Alarm high limit value. Returns Audio Level range information. Returns Audio Level autorange state.Manual 2 .Manual 2 . Returns Audio Level autorange state.GND 0 1 2 3 RMS PEAK PLUS PEAK MINUS PK2PK :alm:coupling? :alm:detector Returns signal coupling. Returns Audio Level range information. Returns Audio Level range information. Returns Alarm low limit state. REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) Audio Level Meter COMMAND :alm:alarm:high:limit :alm:alarm:high:limit? :alm:alarm:high:state :alm:alarm:high:state? :alm:alarm:low:limit :alm:alarm:low:limit? :alm:alarm:low:state :alm:alarm:low:state? :alm:average :alm:average? :alm:coupling RANGE 0. Sets signal coupling. Sets the average size.DC 2 . :alm:range:watts:auto :alm:range:watts:manual :alm:range:watts:range? :alm:range:watts:state? 0 .Manual . Sets Audio Level autorange state to Auto. C-11 . Returns Audio Level autorange state.Auto 1 .Manual 2 . Returns Audio Level range information.Manual .Overload Returns detector type.C-4. :alm:detector? :alm:dvm:overload? :alm:range:dbuv:auto :alm:range:dbuv:manual :alm:range:dbuv:range? :alm:range:dbuv:state? 0 .Auto 1 .Manual . Sets detector type.Manual 2 .AC 1 . :alm:range:volt:auto :alm:range:volt:manual :alm:range:volt:range? :alm:range:volt:state? 0 .Waiting Update Sets Audio Level autorange state to Auto.Auto 1 . Returns Alarm high limit value. Sets Audio Level autorange state to Manual.

0 0. Returns input signal selection.Enable 0 1 2 3 4 V mV d B μV dBm W RANGE 0. :calibration:save Saves individual Calibration. C-12 Subject to Export Control. :calibration:stop Stops individual Calibration.0 to 50. Returns Audio Level Meter reading minimum value Returns Audio Level Meter average value. REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) Audio Level Meter (cont) COMMAND :alm:reading:avg? :alm:reading:clear :alm:reading:max? :alm:reading:min? :alm:reading:val? :alm:scale :alm:scale? :alm:source :alm:source? :alm:state :alm:state? :alm:units 0 .40 V max 2 . Returns Audio Level Meter reading maximum value. :calibration:state? Returns individual Calibration state. . Returns hardware input scaling for the DVM connector.0 to 50. Calibration COMMAND :calibration:continue RANGE 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 GEN REC Audio In GEN REC Audio In GEN REC Audio In GEN REC Audio In Not Running Running Waiting for Continue GEN REC Audio IN DESCRIPTION Continues individual Calibration.0 0.DVM 0 .0 1 . Sets input signal selection. Activates DC offset compensation for the DVM input. 0. Sets current units setting.0 to 50.Disable 1 . Sets Audio Level Meter state. :calibration:start Starts individual Calibration. see Cover Page for details. Clears the meter readings. Returns Audio Level Meter state.AUD IN 1 . Sets hardware input scaling for the DVM connector.2 V max :alm:units? :alm:zero :alm:zero? Returns current units setting.C-4.0 DESCRIPTION Returns Audio Level Meter reading with averaged value.0 to 50. Returns DC offset compensation for the DVM input.

114 43 . C-13 .263 065 38 .432 .152 51 .251 051 36 .343 .072 40 .423 .155 52 .445 .071 39 .431 .131 47 .223 026 31 .156 53 .125 46 .412 .271 .413 .365 . see Cover Page for details.346 .243 032 33 .116 45 . Sets DCS Decode state.364 .132 48 .172 56 .245 047 35 . :dcs:decode:invert :dcs:decode:state :dcs:decode:state? Sets DCS Decode Inverted state.143 50 .115 44 . REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) DCS Decode COMMAND :dcs:decode:getcode? RANGE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 0 1 0 1 023 29 -205 025 30 .261 054 37 .226 031 32 . Subject to Export Control.411 .371 .464 Non-Inverted Inverted OFF ON 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 465 466 503 506 516 532 546 565 606 612 624 627 631 632 654 662 664 703 712 723 731 732 734 743 754 OFF N/S DESCRIPTION Returns DCS Decode number code.315 .311 .165 55 .073 41 .306 .162 54 .174 57 .134 49 .244 043 34 .074 42 .351 .265 .C-4. Returns DCS Decode state.331 .

FM_DEMOD_DEV_8P33 3 .AM_DEMOD_DEV_25 15 . C-14 Subject to Export Control.C-4.AM_DEMOD_DEV_30 Returns Demod AF bandwidth setting.FM_DEMOD_DEV_30 7 . :demod:afbw? :demod:dcpwr :demod:dcpwr? :demod:state :demod:state? :demod:type ON or OFF ON or OFF 0 . Activates Analog Demod.FM_DEMOD_DEV_25 6 .300 to 20000 Hz HPF DESCRIPTION Sets Demod AF Bandwidth. see Cover Page for details. Returns Analog Demod state. Returns DC power state.AM_DEMOD_DEV_12P5 14 . :demod:type? Returns Demod Modulation setting.FM_DEMOD_DEV_10 4 .AM_DEMOD_DEV_6P25 11 .FM_DEMOD_DEV_6P25 2 .FM_DEMOD_DEV_12P5 5 .AM_DEMOD_DEV_8P33 12 .AM_DEMOD_DEV_5 10 . Demod REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) COMMAND :demod:afbw RANGE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 None 300 Hz LPF 3 kHz LPF 5 kHz LPF 15 kHz LPF CMESS BPF CCITT BPF 300 Hz HPF 300 to 3000 Hz HPF 300 to 5000 Hz HPF .AM_DEMOD_DEV_10 13 .FM_DEMOD_DEV_300 9 . Sets Demod Modulation.FM_DEMOD_DEV_100 8 .FM_DEMOD_DEV_5 1 . Sets DC power to ADC. .

0% to 100% .0% to 100% 0. Returns Alarm low limit value.0. Returns Alarm high limit state.0.0.PEAK_READING_PLUS 1 .0 kHz 0. Returns Modulation Meter range information.Waiting Update :devmod:range:fm:auto :devmod:range:fm:manual :devmod:range:fm:range? :devmod:range:fm:state? :devmod:reading:avg? :devmod:reading:clear :devmod:reading:max? :devmod:reading:min? :devmod:reading:peak2peak? :devmod:reading:pk_state :devmod:reading:type 0 1 2 AM FM AM FM AM FM AM FM Auto Manual Manual . C-15 . Sets Alarm high limit state. Selects readings sent to CF Meter. Sets Modulation Meter autorange state to Manual.0.0. Returns Modulation Meter reading current average Peak2Peak value.0. Sets Modulation Meter autorange state to Auto. Returns number of readings to average. Sets Meter Type.0% to 100% FM . Returns Alarm high limit value.0% to 100% 0.0 to 100. Returns Modulation Meter autorange state. Sets Alarm low limit value.0% to 100% .0% to 100% 0.0 kHz Sets Modulation Meter autorange state to Auto. 0 . Returns Modulation Meter reading minimum value Returns Modulation Meter reading Peak2Peak value.0% to 100% FM . Returns Alarm low limit state.0 to 100. Sets number of readings to average. Returns Modulation Meter range information.PK_PK_READING AM FM 0 1 .Manual 2 . Enables/disables reading Peak Hold function. see Cover Page for details. Returns Modulation Meter reading maximum value. Sets Modulation Meter autorange state to Manual.0 kHz AM FM Returns Modulation Meter reading new average Peak2Peak value.PEAK_READING_MINUS 2 . AM . :devmod:reading:type? :devmod:reading:val? :devmod:type :devmod:type? Returns readings sent to CF Meter. Subject to Export Control.Manual .0 to 100.0 kHz 0. REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) Deviation Meter / Modulation Meter COMMAND :devmod:alarm:high:limit :devmod:alarm:high:limit? :devmod:alarm:high:state :devmod:alarm:high:state? :devmod:alarm:low:limit :devmod:alarm:low:limit? :devmod:alarm:low:state :devmod:alarm:low:state? :devmod:average :devmod:average? :devmod:range:am:auto :devmod:range:am:manual :devmod:range:am:range? :devmod:range:am:state? RANGE AM .0.0 kHz DESCRIPTION Sets Alarm high limit value.0 to 100.Auto 1 . Returns Meter Type.0 kHz 0.Waiting Update .C-4.0.0 to 100. Clears Meter reading.0 to 100.0 to 100. Sets Alarm low limit state. Returns Modulation Meter autorange state.0 kHz 1 to 99 0 .

Returns Distortion Meter reading maximum value. 0.0% to 100% 0. Sets Alarm low limit state.0% to 100% 0.0% to 100% 0.0% to 100% 0.0% to 100% 0. .0% to 100% 0.0% to 100% 1 to 99 0.0% to 100% 0. Returns Alarm high limit state. Sets Alarm low limit value. Returns Distortion Meter state on ext audio input. Returns Alarm low limit value. Sets Alarm high limit value. Returns Alarm low limit value.0% to 100% 1 to 99 0. Returns number of readings to average. Returns Distortion Meter reading minimum value.0% to 100% 0. REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) Distortion Meter COMMAND :distortion:demod:alarm:high:limit :distortion:demod:alarm:high:limit? :distortion:demod:alarm:high:state :distortion:demod:alarm:high:state? :distortion:demod:alarm:low:limit :distortion:demod:alarm:low:limit? :distortion:demod:alarm:low:state :distortion:demod:alarm:low:state? :distortion:demod:average :distortion:demod:average? :distortion:demod:reading:avg? :distortion:demod:reading:clear :distortion:demod:reading:max? :distortion:demod:reading:min? :distortion:demod:reading:val? :distortion:demod:state :distortion:demod:state? :distortion:ext_aud_in:alarm:high:limit :distortion:ext_aud_in:alarm:high:limit? :distortion:ext_aud_in:alarm:high:state :distortion:ext_aud_in:alarm:high:state? :distortion:ext_aud_in:alarm:low:limit :distortion:ext_aud_in:alarm:low:limit? :distortion:ext_aud_in:alarm:low:state :distortion:ext_aud_in:alarm:low:state? :distortion:ext_aud_in:average :distortion:ext_aud_in:average? :distortion:ext_aud_in:reading:avg? :distortion:ext_aud_in:reading:clear :distortion:ext_aud_in:reading:max? :distortion:ext_aud_in:reading:min? :distortion:ext_aud_in:reading:val? :distortion:ext_aud_in:state :distortion:ext_aud_in:state? :distortion:fgen:alarm:high:limit :distortion:fgen:alarm:high:limit? 0.0% to 100% C-16 Subject to Export Control. Activates Distortion Meter on ext audio input. Sets number of readings to average. Clear Distortion Meter reading. Returns number of readings to average. Sets Alarm high limit state. Returns Distortion Meter reading minimum value. Sets Alarm low limit state.0% to 100% DESCRIPTION Sets Alarm high limit value. Sets number of readings to average.0% to 100% RANGE 0. Returns Distortion Meter reading with averaged value. Returns Alarm high limit value. Sets Alarm low limit value. Returns Alarm high limit state. Returns Alarm low limit state. Returns Distortion Meter reading maximum value. Returns Alarm high limit value. see Cover Page for details. Returns Alarm high limit value. Sets Alarm high limit state. Clear Distortion Meter reading. Returns Alarm low limit state. Activates Distortion Meter on demod input. Returns Distortion Meter average value. Sets Alarm high limit value. Returns Distortion Meter state on demod input. Returns Distortion Meter average value. Returns Distortion Meter reading with averaged value.C-4.

150 Ω 2 . Returns Alarm low limit value. Sets number of readings to average. Returns Distortion Meter reading with averaged value. Activates Distortion Meter on function generator input.0 0 . Sets Alarm low limit state. Sets Distortion Meter autorange state to Manual.C-4. Sets Distortion Meter autorange state to Auto.0% to 100% 0. Returns Alarm high limit state.600 Ω 3 .Manual 2 . REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) Distortion Meter (cont) COMMAND :distortion:fgen:alarm:high:state :distortion:fgen:alarm:high:state? :distortion:fgen:alarm:low:limit :distortion:fgen:alarm:low:limit? :distortion:fgen:alarm:low:state :distortion:fgen:alarm:low:state? :distortion:fgen:average :distortion:fgen:average? :distortion:fgen:reading:avg? :distortion:fgen:reading:clear :distortion:fgen:reading:max? :distortion:fgen:reading:min? :distortion:fgen:reading:val? :distortion:fgen:state :distortion:fgen:state? :distortion:range? :distortion:range:auto :distortion:range:manual :distortion:range:state? 0 . Returns Distortion Meter reading maximum value. 0. see Cover Page for details. Returns number of readings to average.0% to 100% 1 to 99 0. Sets external audio input ON/OFF.Divide-by-10 ON or OFF DESCRIPTION Sets external audio input gain.0% to 100% External Audio Input COMMAND :extaudin:gain :extaudin:load RANGE 0. Sets output scaling.Auto 1 .Open 1 .0% to 100% 0.1 kΩ (3500A only) 4 .Waiting Update 0. C-17 . Clear Distortion Meter reading. Returns Alarm low limit state. Returns Distortion Meter autorange state. Returns Distortion Meter reading minimum value.Manual . Returns external audio input state. Returns Distortion Meter average value. Returns Distortion Meter range information.0% to 100% RANGE DESCRIPTION Sets Alarm high limit state.0001 to 1. Returns Distortion Meter state on function generator input. :extaudin:mute :extaudin:state :extaudin:state? Sets input state. Sets Alarm low limit value. Subject to Export Control.

REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) External Audio Output COMMAND :extaudout:source RANGE 0 . Returns external audio output state. :extaudout:source? :extaudout:state :extaudout:state? Returns external audio output source. Returns tune start frequency. Sets individual Function Generator frequency.C-4.Fgen1 . see Cover Page for details. Function Generator COMMAND :fgen:enable :fgen:enable? :fgen:freq RANGE DESCRIPTION Sets Function Generator ON/OFF. Returns channel bandwidth step for frequency search.Fgen2 to 24000 Hz . Sets tune threshold.DEMOD_2_EXT_AUD_ OUT 2 . . :fgen:level 1 2 0 1 2 0 .0 dBm 0.Fgen2 to 1. Frequency Find COMMAND :freqfind:peak? :freqfind:start :freqfind:start? :freqfind:stop :freqfind:stop? :freqfind:threshold :freqfind:threshold? :freqfind:channel_boundary :freqfind:channel_boundary? RANGE in MHz 2 to 1000 MHz 2 to 1000 MHz -110. Returns tune threshold. Returns Function Generator condition. Sets tune stop frequency.7 Vrms 600 Ω 150 Ω Open Circuit Fgen1 Fgen2 or OFF Sets individual Function Generator output level. Sets channel bandwidth step for frequency search. :fgen:load :fgen:state 0 1 2 1 2 ON Sets output scaling.0 to 40. Sets individual Function Generator ON/OFF.MODULATION_2_EXT_ AUD_OUT 3 . Sets external audio output ON/OFF.EXT_AUD_IN_2_EXT_ AUD_OUT 1 .000 MHz DESCRIPTION Returns next tune frequency.FGEN_2_EXT_AUD_OUT ON or OFF DESCRIPTION Selects signal source. Returns tune stop frequency. Sets tune start frequency.Fgen1 .001 to 5. C-18 Subject to Export Control.

see Cover Page for details.Stopped 1 .Running DESCRIPTION Activates pre-normalize. Returns normalize status.C-4. REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) Normalize COMMAND :normalize:pre:state :normalize:pre:status? :normalize:recall :normalize:run:state :normalize:run:status? RANGE 0 .Running Subject to Export Control. 0 . Activates normalize. Issues command to database to recall TABLE_CURRENT_NORMALIZE. Returns pre-normalize status.Stopped 1 . C-19 .

C-4.

REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont)

Oscilloscope
COMMAND :scope:coupling RANGE 0 - AC 1 - DC 2 - GND 0 - 2 V max 1 - 40 V max 0 - No Overload 1 - Overload DESCRIPTION Sets Oscilloscope input coupling.

:scope:coupling? :scope:dvm:divby20 :scope:dvm:divby20? :scope:dvm:overload? :scope:offset:horiz :scope:offset:horiz? :scope:offset:vertical :scope:offset:vertical? :scope:scale:horiz

Returns Oscilloscope input coupling. Sets input scaling for DVM Connector. Returns input scaling for DVM Connector. Returns DVM overload status. Sets Oscilloscope input horizontal offset. Returns Oscilloscope input horizontal offset. Sets Oscilloscope input vertical offset. Returns Oscilloscope input vertical offset. Sets Oscilloscope input horizontal scale.

-100.0 to 100.0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 2 0 μs / D i v 5 0 μs / D i v 0.1 ms/Div 0.2 ms/Div 0.5 ms/Div 1 ms/Div 2 ms/Div 4 ms/Div 6 ms/Div 10 ms/Div - 20 ms/Div - 50 ms/Div - 0.1 sec/Div

:scope:scale:horiz? :scope:scale:vertical

0 - 10 mV/Div (DVM / AUDIO IN) 0.1 kHz/Div (DEMOD FM) 5%/Div (DEMOD AM) 1 - 20 mV/Div (DVM / AUDIO IN) 0.2 kHz/Div (DEMOD FM) 10%/Div (DEMOD AM) 2 - 50 mV/Div (DVM / AUDIO IN) 0.5 kHz/Div (DEMOD FM) 20%/Div (DEMOD AM) 3 - 0.1 V/Div (DVM / AUDIO IN) 1 kHz/Div (DEMOD FM) 50%/Div (DEMOD AM) 4 - 0.2 V/Div (DVM / AUDIO IN) 2 kHz/Div (DEMOD FM) 5 - 0.5 V/Div (DVM / AUDIO IN) 5 kHz/Div (DEMOD FM) 6 - 1 V/Div (DVM / AUDIO IN) 10 kHz/Div (DEMOD FM) 7 - 2 V/Div (DVM / AUDIO IN) 20 kHz/Div (DEMOD FM) 8 - 5 V/Div (DVM / AUDIO IN) 50 kHz/Div (DEMOD FM) 9 - 10 V/Div (DVM / AUDIO IN) 0 1 2 3 DVM DEMOD AUD IN FGEN

Returns Oscilloscope input horizontal scale. Sets Oscilloscope input vertical scale.

:scope:scale:vertical? :scope:source

Returns Oscilloscope input vertical scale. Sets Oscilloscope input source.

:scope:source?

Returns Oscilloscope input source.

C-20

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

C-4.

REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont)

Oscilloscope (cont)
COMMAND :scope:state :scope:state? :scope:trace:length? :scope:trace:val? :scope:trigger:edge :scope:trigger:edge? :scope:trigger:level :scope:trigger:level? :scope:trigger:mode RANGE 0 - Disable 1 - Enable DESCRIPTION Sets Oscilloscope input state. Returns Oscilloscope input state. Returns maximum Oscilloscope trace elements. Returns Oscilloscope trace value. Sets Oscilloscope input trigger edge. Returns Oscilloscope input trigger edge. Sets Oscilloscope input trigger level. Returns Oscilloscope input trigger level. Sets Oscilloscope input trigger mode.

0 - FALL 1 - RISE

0 - NORMAL 1 - AUTO 2 - SINGLE 0 - NORMAL 1 - AUTO 2 - SINGLE 0 - FALL 1 - RISE LEVEL

:scope:trigger:mode? :scope:trigger:type

Returns Oscilloscope input trigger mode. Sets Oscilloscope input trigger.

Options
COMMAND :options:flash? :options:isactive? RANGE ID Number 35000001 35000010 35000060 35000070 35000100 0 - Not Installed 1 - Installed Aeroflex 3500 3500 or 3500A 10 Digit SN DESCRIPTION Returns unique ID Number. Returns status of installed Option.

:options:man? :options:model? :options:productid? :options:serial?

Returns Returns Returns Returns

manufacturer’s name. model number. product number. serial number.

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

C-21

C-4.
P25

REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont)

COMMAND :p25:rx:average:dev :p25:rx:average:dev? :p25:rx:average:freq :p25:rx:average:freq? :p25:rx:average:freq_err :p25:rx:average:freq_err? :p25:rx:average:mod_fid :p25:rx:average:mod_fid? :p25:rx:average:pwr :p25:rx:average:pwr? :p25:rx:average:time :p25:rx:average:time? :p25:rx:config :p25:rx:dev:clear :p25:rx:dev:limit:lower :p25:rx:dev:limit:lower? :p25:rx:dev:limit:state :p25:rx:dev:limit:state? :p25:rx:dev:limit:upper :p25:rx:dev:limit:upper? :p25:rx:dev:val?

RANGE 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99 1 to 99

DESCRIPTION Sets number of readings to average. Returns current average setting. Sets number of readings to average. Returns current average setting. Sets number of readings to average. Returns current average setting. Sets number of readings to average. Returns current average setting. Sets number of readings to average. Returns current average setting. Sets number of readings to average. Returns current average setting. Configures P25. (Must be run after setting P25 State to 1 before taking readings.) Clears the current Deviation minimum, maximum and average settings. Sets lower limit value. Returns lower limit value. Sets limit state. Returns limit state. Sets upper limit value. Returns upper limit value. Returns current value.

0 - OFF 1 - ON

0 - Average 1 - Maximum 2 - Minimum

:p25:rx:freq:clear :p25:rx:freq:val? 0 - Average 1 - Maximum 2 - Minimum

Clears the current Frequency minimum, maximum and average settings. Returns current value.

:p25:rx:freq_err:clear :p25:rx:freq_err:limit:lower :p25:rx:freq_err:limit:lower? :p25:rx:freq_err:limit:state :p25:rx:freq_err:limit:state? :p25:rx:freq_err:limit:upper :p25:rx:freq_err:limit:upper? :p25:rx:freq_err:val?

0 - OFF 1 - ON

Clears the current Frequency Error minimum, maximum and average settings. Sets lower limit value. Returns lower limit value. Sets limit state. Returns limit state. Sets upper limit value. Returns upper limit value. Returns current value.

0 - Average 1 - Maximum 2 - Minimum

:p25:rx:mod_fid:clear :p25:rx:mod_fid:limit:lower :p25:rx:mod_fid:limit:lower? :p25:rx:mod_fid:limit:state :p25:rx:mod_fid:limit:state? :p25:rx:mod_fid:limit:upper

0 - OFF 1 - ON

Clears the current Mod Fidelity minimum, maximum and average settings. Sets lower limit value. Returns lower limit value. Sets limit state. Returns limit state. Sets upper limit value.

C-22

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

C-4.

REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont)

P25 (cont)
COMMAND :p25:rx:mod_fid:limit:upper? :p25:rx:mod_fid:val? RANGE 0 - Average 1 - Maximum 2 - Minimum 0 - 1011 1 - Cal 2 - 0.153 DESCRIPTION Returns upper limit value. Returns current value.

:p25:rx:nac:val? :p25:rx:pattern

Returns current value of Network Access Code. Sets decode pattern.

:p25:rx:pwr:clear :p25:rx:pwr:limit:lower :p25:rx:pwr:limit:lower? :p25:rx:pwr:limit:state :p25:rx:pwr:limit:state? :p25:rx:pwr:limit:upper :p25:rx:pwr:limit:upper? :p25:rx:pwr:val?

0 - OFF 1 - ON

Clears the current Power minimum, maximum and average settings. Sets lower limit value. Returns lower limit value. Sets limit state. Returns limit state. Sets upper limit value. Returns upper limit value. Returns current value.

0 - Average 1 - Maximum 2 - Minimum 0 - OFF 1 - ON

:p25:rx:reset_acq :p25:rx:state :p25:rx:state? :p25:rx:time:clear :p25:rx:time:val?

Resets variables. Sets P25 state. Returns P25 state. Clears the current Time minimum, maximum and average settings. Returns current value.

:p25:tx:enable :p25:tx:err :p25:tx:nac :p25:tx:pattern

0 1 2 0 1 0

- Average - Maximum - Minimum - OFF - ON to 20

Sets enable. Sets number of false errors on transmitted signal. Sets Network Access Code. Sets decode pattern.

000 to FFF 0 - 1011 1 - Cal 2 - 0.153

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

C-23

C-4.
Receiver

REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont)

COMMAND :rec:atten? :rec:dcpwr :rec:extpad :rec:extpad? :rec:freq :rec:freq? :rec:port :rec:port? :rec:port:protection

RANGE 0, 10, 20 or 30 dB 0 - OFF 1 - ON -30.0 to 30.0 dB

DESCRIPTION Returns Receiver attenuator setting. Sets Receiver DC Power state. Sets compensation of Receiver TOS for external pad. Returns value of compensation for external pad. Sets Receiver frequency. Returns Receiver frequency. Sets Receiver Input Connector. Returns Receiver Input Connector selected. Resets ANT Connector protection circuit.

2.000000 to 1000.000000 MHz 0 - T/R 1 - ANT 0 - OFF 1 - RESET 2 - ON

RF Error Meter
COMMAND :rferr:alarm:high:limit :rferr:alarm:high:limit? :rferr:alarm:high:state :rferr:alarm:high:state? :rferr:alarm:low:limit :rferr:alarm:low:limit? :rferr:alarm:low:state :rferr:alarm:low:state? :rferr:average :rferr:average? :rferr:interval :rferr:interval? :rferr:range? :rferr:range:auto :rferr:range:manual :rferr:range:state? RANGE 0.0 to 200.0 kHz DESCRIPTION Sets Alarm high limit value. Returns Alarm high limit value. Sets Alarm high limit state. Returns Alarm high limit state. Sets Alarm low limit value. Returns Alarm low limit value. Sets Alarm low limit state. Returns Alarm low limit state. Sets number of readings to average. Returns number of readings to average. Sets RF Counter update interval. Returns RF Counter interval. Returns RF Error Meter range information. Sets RF Error Meter autorange state to Auto. Sets RF Error Meter autorange state to Manual. Returns RF Error Meter autorange state.

0.0 to 200.0 kHz

1 to 99 0.0 to 53.0 sec

:rferr:reading:avg? :rferr:reading:clear :rferr:reading:max? :rferr:reading:min? :rferr:reading:val? :rferr:relative :rferr:relative? :rferr:state :rferr:state?

0 - Auto 1 - Manual 2 - Manual - Waiting Update 0.0 to 200.0 kHz

0.0 to 200.0 kHz 0.0 to 200.0 kHz 0.0 to 200.0 kHz 0 - Absolute 1 - Relative

Returns RF Error Counter reading averaged value. Clears RF Error Counter reading. Returns RF Error Counter reading maximum value. Returns RF Error Counter reading minimum value. Returns RF Error Counter reading with no statistics. Sets RF Error to absolute or relative counting using the Receiver RF. Returns if RF Error set to absolute or relative counting. Activates RF Error Counter. Returns state of RF Error Counter.

C-24

Subject to Export Control, see Cover Page for details.

C-25 .-90 to -30 dBm :gen:lvl:dbm? :gen:lvl:unit :gen:lvl:uv :gen:lvl:uv? :gen:port 0 .OFF 1 . 7 4 t o 1 2 5 7 4 3 .-65 to -5 dBm T/R . 2 2 3 6 1 t o 7 0 7 .1 2 5 . Sets RF Generator frequency. Returns value of compensation for external pad.T/R 1 .000000 to 1000. Returns RF Generator level on selected output connector.ON -30.0 dB DESCRIPTION Returns ANT Connector protection state. 0 .μV S W R . Resets SWR Connector protection circuit. Sets RF Generator level on selected output connector. 3 4 μV T / R . Returns RF Generator frequency.ANT 2 . Sets compensation of RF Generator output level for external pad.-120 to -50 dBm ANT . Sets RF Generator Output Connector. REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) RF Generator COMMAND :gen:ant:protection? :gen:atten? :gen:dcpwr :gen:extpad :gen:extpad? :gen:freq :gen:freq? :gen:lvl:dbm RANGE 0 .SWR 0 1 2 0 1 0 1 OFF RESET ON OFF ON (Overload) OFF ON (Overload) :gen:port? :gen:port:protection Returns RF Generator Output Connector selected. see Cover Page for details. 0 7 μV S e t s R F G e n e r a t o r l e v e l u n i t s t o μV o r d B m .000000 MHz SWR . Sets RF Generator DC Power state. 1 1 μV A N T . Sets RF Generator level on selected output connector. 0 7 1 t o 7 0 7 1 .0 .dBm 1 .0 to 30. Returns RF Generator level on selected output connector. Returns RF Generator attenuator setting. Subject to Export Control. 2. :gen:swr:protection? :gen:tr:protection? Returns SWR Connector protection state.OFF 1 . Returns T/R Connector protection state.7 .ON (Overload) 0 to 63 dB 0 .C-4.

Sets number of readings to average. Takes correction freq and index to fill cal table. Returns low power cal curve size. Returns number of readings to average. Returns response cal curve size. Recalculates Calibration. Sets RF Power Meter autorange state to Auto.Normal PT Operation 1 . REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) RF Power Meter COMMAND :rfpow:alarm:high:limit :rfpow:alarm:high:limit? :rfpow:alarm:high:state :rfpow:alarm:high:state? :rfpow:alarm:low:limit :rfpow:alarm:low:limit? :rfpow:alarm:low:state :rfpow:alarm:low:state? :rfpow:average :rfpow:average? :rfpow:cal:freq:resp? :rfpow:cal:lin:high:calpt :rfpow:cal:lin:high:dac? :rfpow:cal:lin:high:pow? :rfpow:cal:lin:high:size :rfpow:cal:lin:high:size? :rfpow:cal:lin:low:calpt :rfpow:cal:lin:low:dac? :rfpow:cal:lin:low:pow? :rfpow:cal:lin:low:size :rfpow:cal:lin:low:size? :rfpow:cal:recalc :rfpow:cal:recall :rfpow:cal:resp:calpt :rfpow:cal:resp:calpt? :rfpow:cal:resp:size :rfpow:cal:resp:size? :rfpow:cal:save :rfpow:cal:state RANGE 1. Returns frequency in MHz at supplied index.High Range 2 .0 to 43.0 to 43. Sets Calibration State 1.0 W 1 to 99 0 . Sets Alarm low limit value. Returns Alarm low limit value.C-4.0 to +30. Sets Alarm high limit state. . Clears previous low range cal curve and resizes as required. Returns Alarm high limit value.Range Cal 2 .Low Range 1 . :rfpow:range:dbm:range? :rfpow:range:dbm:auto :rfpow:range:dbm:manual Returns RF Power Meter range information.1 to 20. Returns dBm value at supplied index. Saves Calibration Data. Returns high power cal curve size. Returns cal factor value at supplied index. Returns DAC value at supplied index.0 dBm 0.Response Cal -30. Sets compensation factor for external attenuation. Sets RF Power Meter autorange state to Manual. Takes current low power reading and supplied cal value at supplied index. Takes current high power reading and supplied cal value at supplied index. Returns Alarm high limit state. Returns dac value at supplied index. Returns Alarm low limit state.0 dBm 0.0 dB :rfpow:cal:state? :rfpow:extatten :rfpow:extatten? :rfpow:range 0 .0 W DESCRIPTION Sets Alarm high limit value.1 to 20.Auto Range Returns Calibration State. Clears previous response cal curve and resizes as required. Sets reading range operation. see Cover Page for details. Returns compensation factor for external attenuation. C-26 Subject to Export Control. Returns dBm value at supplied index. Recalls Calibration Data. Sets Alarm low limit state. Clears previous high range cal curve and resizes as required.

Auto 1 .dBm 1 .Waiting Update dBm dBm dBm RF Power Meter range information. Returns RF Power Counter reading maximum value.0 to 43.0 dBm 1. :rfpow:range:watts:range? :rfpow:range:watts:auto :rfpow:range:watts:manual :rfpow:range:watts:state? 0 .C-4. C-27 . Returns RF Power Counter reading maximum value. Returns RF Power Counter reading maximum value.Watts Returns RF Power Counter average reading. Returns RF Power Counter average reading.0 to 43.00125 to 20 W 0. Returns RF Power Counter average reading.0 to 43. Returns RF Power Counter average reading. Power Meter autorange state to RF Power Meter autorange state. Returns RF Power Counter average reading. Returns state of RF Power Meter.0 to 43.0 dBm 1. Sets units for reading.0 to 43. Returns RF Power Counter reading minimum value. Enables/disables RF Power Meter operation. Returns . Returns RF Power Counter average reading. Starts zero operation required before measurements.00125 to 20 W 0.0 Returns Sets RF Sets RF Manual.0 to 43. Returns RF Power Counter reading minimum value. :rfpow:reading:avg? :rfpow:reading:dbm:avg? :rfpow:reading:dbm:max? :rfpow:reading:dbm:min? :rfpow:reading:dbm:val? :rfpow:reading:max? :rfpow:reading:min? :rfpow:reading:val? :rfpow:reading:watt:avg? :rfpow:reading:watt:max? :rfpow:reading:watt:min? :rfpow:reading:watt:val? :rfpow:state :rfpow:state? :rfpow:units :rfpow:zero 1.0 to 43.0 dBm 0. Subject to Export Control.Manual 2 . see Cover Page for details. Returns RF Power Counter reading minimum value. Power Meter autorange state to Auto.00125 to 20 W 0.00125 to 20 W 0 .0 dBm 1. REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) RF Power Meter (cont) COMMAND :rfpow:range:dbm:state? RANGE 0 .Manual 2 .Auto 1 .0 1.Waiting Update DESCRIPTION Returns RF Power Meter autorange state.Manual 1.Manual .0 1.0 dBm 1.0 to 43.

Returns Audio Level autorange state.Waiting Update :rssi:range:watts:auto :rssi:range:watts:manual :rssi:range:watts:range? :rssi:range:watts:state? :rssi:reading:avg? :rssi:reading:dbm:avg? :rssi:reading:dbm:max? :rssi:reading:dbm:min? :rssi:reading:dbm:val? :rssi:reading:clear :rssi:reading:max? :rssi:reading:min? :rssi:reading:units 0 . Returns Alarm high limit state. Returns RSSI reading minimum value. Sets Alarm low limit value. Returns RSSI reading averaged value. Returns state of RSSI Meter.μW a t t s -110 to 43 dBm 0 to 20 W 0 to 20 W 0 to 20 W 0 to 20 W Sets Audio Level autorange state to Auto. Sets Audio Level autorange state to Manual. C-28 Subject to Export Control. Returns Alarm low limit state. :rssi:reading:val? :rssi:reading:watt:avg? :rssi:reading:watt:max? :rssi:reading:watt:min? :rssi:reading:watt:val? :rssi:state :rssi:state? Returns RSSI reading with no statistics.Manual 2 . Returns Audio Level autorange state.Auto 1 . Returns Alarm low limit value. Returns Audio Level range information. Returns RSSI reading with no statistics. minimum value. Returns number of readings to average.Auto 1 . . Sets Audio Level autorange state to Auto. Returns RSSI reading Returns RSSI reading Sets displayed units.Watts 2 . Sets Alarm high limit state.Waiting Update -110 to 43 dBm -110 to 43 dBm -110 to 43 dBm -110 to 43 dBm -110 to 43 dBm -110 to 43 dBm -110 to 43 dBm 0 . maximum value. maximum value.Manual . see Cover Page for details. Returns Alarm high limit value.C-4. averaged value. Sets number of readings to average. Activates RSSI readings. 0 to 20 W 1 to 99 0 . Sets Alarm low limit state. Returns RSSI reading maximum value. REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) RSSI Meter COMMAND :rssi:alarm:high:limit :rssi:alarm:high:limit? :rssi:alarm:high:state :rssi:alarm:high:state? :rssi:alarm:low:limit :rssi:alarm:low:limit? :rssi:alarm:low:state :rssi:alarm:low:state? :rssi:average :rssi:average? :rssi:range:dbm:auto :rssi:range:dbm:manual :rssi:range:dbm:range? :rssi:range:dbm:state? RANGE 0 to 20 W DESCRIPTION Sets Alarm high limit value. minimum value. averaged value.Manual 2 .dBm 1 .Manual . with no statistics. Returns RSSI reading Returns RSSI reading Returns RSSI reading Returns RSSI reading Returns RSSI reading Clears RSSI reading. Sets Audio Level autorange state to Manual. Returns Audio Level range information.

Self Test Screen. Sinad Meter Screen. USB Manager Screen. Tracking Generator Screen. ANT-Cable Test Screen. Audio Function Generator Test Screen. Options Screen. Version Screen. Screens REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) COMMAND :screen:af_counter_meter :screen:analyzer :screen:annunciator :screen:audio :screen:audio_level_meter :screen:audio_setup :screen:date_time_config :screen:diagnostic_tests :screen:distortion_meter :screen:duplex_test :screen:duplex_test_setup :screen:hwconfig :screen:options :screen:receiver_test :screen:receiver_test_setup :screen:remote_config :screen:scope :screen:self_test :screen:sinad_meter :screen:swr_test :screen:trackgen :screen:transmitter_test :screen:transmitter_test_setup :screen:unitcopy :screen:usbmanager :screen:version RANGE DESCRIPTION Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects Selects AF Counter Meter Screen. Oscilloscope Screen. C-29 . Diagnostic Screen. Duplex Test Screen. see Cover Page for details. Audio Function Generator Setup Screen. HW Config Screen. Duplex Test Setup Screen. Distortion Meter Screen.C-4. Remote Screen. Analyzer Screen. Audio Level Meter Screen. Unit Copy Screen. Annunciator Screen. Date/Time Screen. Receiver Test Screen. Transmitter Test Setup Screen. Receiver Test Setup Screen. Subject to Export Control. Transmitter Test Screen.

Reads in from RS-232 until the term character is reached or timeout occurs. 38400. 7. Waits for Key Event. Writes to RS-232 Connector. 1 (even parity). pausing between each character. Signals the end of a running script. 2400. 230400 Byte Size: 5. 2 Crtscts: 0 (flow off). Returns Key Code Prints diagnostic messages to the console via PPC RS-232. 2 (odd parity). Places Meters on a Screen. Clears Meters on a Screen. Sets the event for the Soft Key to a Lua Command. 8 Parity: 0 (no parity). 4800. "ESC" returns an empty string. xpos (top left corner) ypos (top left corner) 1 to 16 (size) :scripting:event:enable :scripting:event:idle :scripting:event:idle:dcib :scripting:exit :scripting:getkey? :scripting:log:print 1 to 5 Lua Command :scripting:meter:clear :scripting:meter:enable :scripting:meter:place :scripting:rci:cmd :scripting:rci:resp :scripting:rs232:close :scripting:rs232:config <position> Meter Name Baud Rate: 1200. 57600. Configures the RS-232 Connector.C-4. Creates a Dialog Box. Size is the number of characters to be read. "DONE" returns the inputted data. 6. see Cover Page for details. Sends RCI Command. C-30 Subject to Export Control. Create a box on a Dialog Screen to input data and creates two Soft Keys (“ESC” and "DONE"). . 115200. Waits for Key Event without closing Dialog Box. 19200. 3 (space parity) Stop Bits: 1. 9600. Returns Key Code. Closes the RS-232 connection. Returns RCI Response. REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) Scripting COMMAND :scripting:alarm :scripting:checkkey? :scripting:dialog:close :scripting:dialog:create :scripting:entry:idle RANGE 0 to 1000 ms DESCRIPTION Sets the duration of the Alarm. The PPC RS-232 uses a fixed setting of 115200N81. Closes an open Dialog Box. 1 (flow on) Timeout: Integer Term: Terminating character in hex format <string> in ms (pause time) :scripting:rs232:open :scripting:rs232:pacewrite :scripting:rs232:read Opens the RS-232 connection. Enables Meters on a Screen.

y coordinates on the Dialog Box. Writes to RS-232 Connector. For time >1 minute. REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) Scripting (cont) COMMAND :scripting:rs232:readsize :scripting:rs232:wait :scripting:rs232:write :scripting:screen :scripting:screen:print RANGE <string> <timeout> <string> X_VAL Y_VAL “String” DESCRIPTION Reads Number of Characters in RS-232 Buffer. Prints the given string to the given x. Returns to the Scripts Screen. the Sleep time is truncated to 1 minute. Waits until the given string is read. Clears all the Soft Key Labels. :scripting:screen:print:invert :scripting:screen:box :scripting:screen:image :scripting:screen”image:noinvert :scripting:screen rectangle :scripting:sleep :scripting:softkey:clear :scripting:softkey:label in ms 1 to 5 Label Name Subject to Export Control. Sets the Sleep time. C-31 .C-4.y coordinates on the Dialog Box with Inverted Colors. see Cover Page for details. Prints “xmb” file to a Dialog Box without color. Sets the Soft Key Label. Prints a Rectangle to the Scripting Dialog. Prints the given string to the given x. Prints “xmb” file to a Dialog Box. Prints a Box to the Scripting Dialog.

Sets tone mute ON/OFF. Setup REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) COMMAND :setup:battery:overload? :setup:battery:remaining? :setup:database:usb:save :setup:database:usb:recall :setup:date:cal:new :setup:date:cal_due? :setup:date:current? :setup:date:new :setup:ftp:database:recall :setup:ftp:database:save :setup:ftp:server :setup:ftp:server? :setup:mod_source:more RANGE 0 to 99 DESCRIPTION Returns battery overload condition.C-4. Sets Remote output on Pin 29. Sets tone state ON/OFF. Returns Remote input on Pin 28. 10. Sets Remote output on Pin 30. Retrieves archive database from FTP and restores cals. Day. Archives database and transfers file to FTP server. Sets date in RTC. . Sets tone for a specified duration using a specified frequency. Enables power down function when timeout timer expires. Enables tone on each keypad key press. Returns state of key click. Clears report. Returns power down function state. Month. Sets alarm mute ON/OFF. Sets Ethernet address of FTP server. 10. Retrieves archive database from USB and restores cals. Sets PTT ON/OFF. Returns Remote input on Pin 40. Year 10. 193 (10.193) 0 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 GEN1 and GEN 2 DCS DTMF P25 <> Hz <> Hz <> ms <> ms :setup:piezo:alarm Sets alarm for a specified duration using two specified frequencies and a rate that the frequencies oscillate back and forth.10. Sets Modulation Source tile tab to a specified tab. Archives database and transfer file to attached USB flash drive. Writes next Calibration Date into RTC Returns next Calibration Date. Returns the current date. Returns Remote input on all 4 input pins. see Cover Page for details. Returns Ethernet address of FTP server. Sets Remote output on Pin 41. Sets Remote output on Pin 15. Returns battery remaining charge capacity. Month. Sets alarm state ON/OFF. :setup:piezo:alarm:mute :setup:piezo:alarm:state :setup:piezo:keyclick :setup:piezo:keyclick? :setup:piezo:tone :setup:piezo:tone:mute :setup:piezo:tone:state :setup:powerdown :setup:powerdown? :setup:ptt:35xx :setup:ptt:hw? :setup:rec:more :setup:rem:in13? :setup:rem:in14? :setup:rem:in28? :setup:rem:in40? :setup:rem:inall :setup:rem:out15 :setup:rem:out29 :setup:rem:out30 :setup:rem:out41 :setup:report:clear 0 1 2 3 0 1 - Aeroflex Mic H-250 Mic Headset Mic Aeroflex Breakout Box Ext Atten dB Cable Offset Preamp Sets Receiver tile tab to a specified tab. C-32 Subject to Export Control. Year Day. Returns PTT hardware.txt file. Returns Remote input on Pin 14.10. Returns Remote input on Pin 13.

Restores all screens to default settings. Returns RF hardware version number (FPGA). Returns Multi-Function PCB Assy version number. Returns PPC Application Code version number.C-4.Started 3 . Writes Time into RTC. see Cover Page for details. Returns Time. Returns battery temperature in degrees. Returns ColdFire MAC address. REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) Setup (cont) COMMAND :setup:screen:default :setup:screen:default:all :setup:screen:save :setup:screen:save:status? 1 . :setup:sleeptime :setup:sleeptime? :setup:temp:battery? :setup:temp:internal? :setup:temp:remote? :setup:time:active? :setup:time:current? :setup:time:new :setup:version:coldfire? :setup:version:cfmacaddr? :setup:version:cpld:digital? :setup:version:cpld:rf? :setup:version:fpga? :setup:version:mf_hdw? :setup:version:powerpc? :setup:version:rf_hdw? Sets timeout timer time in minutes. Returns CPLD RF version number. Saves current screen settings to Flash Memory. C-33 .Completed RANGE DESCRIPTION Restores current screen settings to default settings. Returns total time unit has been powered on. Seconds Subject to Export Control. Returns CPLD Digital version number. Returns FPGA version number. Returns save status. 2 Hours. Returns timeout timer time in minutes. Returns ColdFire Application Code version number. Returns I C temperature in degrees.Triggered 2 . Returns FPGA temperature in degrees. Minutes.

ON 0. Sets DTMF Encode State. Sets DTMF Encode Idle. Sets DTMF Encode Message. REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) Signaling COMMAND :signaling:dcs:disable :signaling:dcs:getcode? :signaling:dcs:getpolarity? :signaling:dcs:setcode :signaling:dcs:setpolarity :signaling:dcs:start :signaling:dcs:state :signaling:dcs:turnoff :signaling:dtmf:decode:idle :signaling:dtmf:decode:idle? :signaling:dtmf:decode:lastmessage? :signaling:dtmf:decode:message? :signaling:dtmf:decode:state :signaling:dtmf:decode:state? :signaling:dtmf:encode:idle :signaling:dtmf:encode:idle? :signaling:dtmf:encode:mark :signaling:dtmf:encode:mark? :signaling:dtmf:encode:message :signaling:dtmf:encode:message? :signaling:dtmf:encode:oneshot 0 .0 sec 0 to 1000 ms Up to 20 valid DTMF Tones RANGE DESCRIPTION Disables DCS Encode (immediate stop). Returns DCS Encode Polarity.0 to 100. Returns DTMF Encode Message. Sets DCS Encode Polarity.e.OFF 1 .0 to 100. Enter 19 for DCS Code 023). Transmits DTMF Encode Message Only Once. Returns current DTMF Message being decoded. Returns DTMF Encode State. Returns DTMF Encode Space. Sets DTMF Decode State. Returns last complete DTMF message decoded. Returns DTMF Decode Idle.OFF 1 . . Sets DTMF Decode Idle.ON 0.Non-Inverted 1 . Sets DTMF Encode Mark. Sets DCS Encode State. (DCS Code in Decimal) 0 . see Cover Page for details. Returns DTMF Encode Mark. Returns DTMF Encode Idle. Returns DTMF Decode State.OFF 1 . Sets DCS Encode Code (i. Disables DCS Encode (200 ms delay). (Valid only when DTMF Encode Space is set to OFF.C-4. Starts DCS Encode.0 sec :signaling:dtmf:encode:space :signaling:dtmf:encode:space? :signaling:dtmf:encode:state :signaling:dtmf:encode:state? 0 to 1000 ms 0 . Returns DCS Encode Code.) Sets DTMF Encode Space.ON C-34 Subject to Export Control..Inverted 0 .

Sets Alarm high limit state. Clear Sinad Meter reading.0 to 60. Returns Alarm high limit state. Returns Sinad Meter reading maximum value. Returns Alarm high limit value. Activates Sinad Meter on demod input. Sets number of readings to average. Sets Alarm low limit state.0 dB 0.0 to 60. see Cover Page for details.0 dB 1 to 99 0.0 to 60. Returns Alarm high limit value. Returns Sinad Meter reading with averaged value. Sets Alarm low limit value. Returns number of readings to average. Returns Alarm low limit state.0 dB Subject to Export Control. Returns Sinad Meter reading minimum value.C-4. Sets Alarm low limit state. Sets Alarm high limit state.0 to 60.0 to 60.0 dB 1 to 99 0. Returns Alarm high limit state. Activates Sinad Meter on ext audio input.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 to 60. Sets number of readings to average.0 to 60. Returns Sinad Meter state on demod input.0 dB RANGE 0. Returns number of readings to average.0 dB 0. Sets Alarm low limit value. Returns Sinad Meter average value. Clear Sinad Meter reading.0 dB 0. Returns Sinad Meter reading with averaged value. Returns Sinad Meter reading maximum value.0 to 60.0 dB DESCRIPTION Sets Alarm high limit value. Returns Alarm low limit value. Returns Alarm high limit value. Returns Alarm low limit state. Sets Alarm low limit value. Sets Alarm high limit state.0 to 60. Sets Alarm high limit value. C-35 . Returns Alarm low limit value.0 to 60.0 dB 0. Returns Sinad Meter average value.0 dB 0. 0. REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) Sinad Meter COMMAND :sinad:demod:alarm:high:limit :sinad:demod:alarm:high:limit? :sinad:demod:alarm:high:state :sinad:demod:alarm:high:state? :sinad:demod:alarm:low:limit :sinad:demod:alarm:low:limit? :sinad:demod:alarm:low:state :sinad:demod:alarm:low:state? :sinad:demod:average :sinad:demod:average? :sinad:demod:reading:avg? :sinad:demod:reading:clear :sinad:demod:reading:max? :sinad:demod:reading:min? :sinad:demod:reading:val? :sinad:demod:state :sinad:demod:state? :sinad:ext_aud_in:alarm:high:limit :sinad:ext_aud_in:alarm:high:limit? :sinad:ext_aud_in:alarm:high:state :sinad:ext_aud_in:alarm:high:state? :sinad:ext_aud_in:alarm:low:limit :sinad:ext_aud_in:alarm:low:limit? :sinad:ext_aud_in:alarm:low:state :sinad:ext_aud_in:alarm:low:state? :sinad:ext_aud_in:average :sinad:ext_aud_in:average? :sinad:ext_aud_in:reading:avg? :sinad:ext_aud_in:reading:clear :sinad:ext_aud_in:reading:max? :sinad:ext_aud_in:reading:min? :sinad:ext_aud_in:reading:val? :sinad:ext_aud_in:state :sinad:ext_aud_in:state? :sinad:fgen:alarm:high:limit :sinad:fgen:alarm:high:limit? :sinad:fgen:alarm:high:state :sinad:fgen:alarm:high:state? :sinad:fgen:alarm:low:limit 0. Returns Alarm high limit state. Returns Sinad Meter reading minimum value.0 dB 0.0 to 60. Returns Sinad Meter state on ext audio input.0 to 60.0 to 60. Sets Alarm high limit value.0 dB 0.0 to 60.

0 to 60. Sets Sinad Meter autorange state to Auto. Returns Sinad Meter reading minimum value.Manual 2 . :speaker:source? :speaker:state :speaker:state? :speaker:volume :speaker:volume? ON or OFF 0 to 100 Returns speaker input source. Sets Sinad Meter autorange state to Manual. Sets Alarm low limit state. . Clear Sinad Meter reading.0 dB 0. Returns Sinad Meter state on function generator input. REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) Sinad Meter (cont) COMMAND :sinad:fgen:alarm:low:limit? :sinad:fgen:alarm:low:state :sinad:fgen:alarm:low:state? :sinad:fgen:average :sinad:fgen:average? :sinad:fgen:reading:avg? :sinad:fgen:reading:clear :sinad:fgen:reading:max? :sinad:fgen:reading:min? :sinad:fgen:reading:val? :sinad:fgen:state :sinad:fgen:state? :sinad:range? :sinad:range:auto :sinad:range:manual :sinad:range:state? 0 . Selects signal source.0 to 60. 1 to 99 0. Sets speaker volume.Waiting Update RANGE DESCRIPTION Returns Alarm low limit value.0 dB 0. Activates Sinad Meter on function generator input.0 to 60. Returns speaker level squelch level. C-36 Subject to Export Control. Returns Sinad Meter autorange state. Sets number of readings to average.Auto 1 . Returns speaker output state.0 dB 0. see Cover Page for details. Returns number of readings to average.0 to 60. Returns Alarm low limit state.C-4. Sets speaker noise squelch level. Returns speaker volume. Returns Sinad Meter range information.0 dB Speaker COMMAND :speaker:level:squelch:level :speaker:level:squelch:level? :speaker:noise:squelch:level :speaker:noise:squelch:level? :speaker:source RANGE -150 to 50 0 to 100 0 1 2 3 EXT_AUD_IN_2_SPEAKER DEMOD_2_SPEAKER MODULATION_2_SPEAKER FGEN_2_SPEAKER DESCRIPTION Sets speaker level squelch level. Returns Sinad Meter reading maximum value. Returns speaker noise squelch level. Returns Sinad Meter average value. Turns speaker output ON/OFF.Manual . Returns Sinad Meter reading with averaged value.

:analyzer:span? :analyzer:state :analyzer:state? :analyzer:trace:amplitude? :analyzer:trace:frequency? Returns Spectrum Analyzer span. :analyzer:pwrbwspan? :analyzer:reading:bwpwr? :analyzer:reading:rbwe? :analyzer:sleep :analyzer:sleep? :analyzer:span in dBm in Hz 1 0 0 0 0 t o 5 0 0 0 0 0 μs 10000 Hz 20000 Hz 50000 Hz 100000 Hz 200000 Hz 500000 Hz 1000000 Hz 2000000 Hz 5000000 Hz Returns Spectrum Analyzer power bandwidth span. REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) Spectrum Analyzer COMMAND :analyzer:avg :analyzer:avg? :analyzer:current:avg? :analyzer:freq :analyzer:freq? :analyzer:marker:freq :analyzer:marker:freq? :analyzer:psd :analyzer:psd? :analyzer:peakhold :analyzer:peakhold? :analyzer:pwrbwspan 0 . Subject to Export Control. Returns Spectrum Analyzer center frequency. Activates Spectrum Analyzer peak hold. Returns Spectrum Analyzer trace amplitude.C-4. Returns Spectrum Analyzer marker center frequency. C-37 . Activates Spectrum Analyzer signal processing.ON 1000 Hz 2000 Hz 5000 Hz 10000 Hz 20000 Hz 50000 Hz 100000 Hz 200000 Hz 500000 Hz 1000000 Hz 2000000 Hz 5000000 Hz 0 . Sets Spectrum Analyzer power bandwidth span.OFF 1 . Returns Spectrum Analyzer sleep time. Sets Spectrum Analyzer center frequency. Returns Spectrum Analyzer power spectral density. Sets Spectrum Analyzer marker center frequency. Returns Spectrum Analyzer peak hold status. Returns number of traces for current Spectrum Analyzer trace reading.Power Spectral Density RANGE 1 to 99 0 to 99 2 to 1000 MHz 2 to 1000 MHz DESCRIPTION Sets Spectrum Analyzer average. Sets Spectrum Analyzer sleep time. Sets Spectrum Analyzer power spectral density.Spectrum 1 . Returns Spectrum Analyzer signal processing state. Returns Spectrum Analyzer bandwidth power. Sets Spectrum Analyzer span. Returns Spectrum Analyzer resolution bandwidth equivalent. see Cover Page for details. Returns Spectrum Analyzer average. Returns Spectrum Analyzer trace frequency.

:analyzer:trace:length? :analyzer:trace:points? :analyzer:window 0 1 2 3 - HANNING FLATTOP RECTANGULAR BLACKMAN Returns Spectrum Analyzer graph width. Sets Spectrum Analyzer window size. see Cover Page for details. . Returns Spectrum Analyzer graph points. :analyzer:window? Returns Spectrum Analyzer window size. C-38 Subject to Export Control. REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) Spectrum Analyzer (cont) COMMAND :analyzer:trace:length RANGE 0 1 2 3 4 768 256 180 128 90 DESCRIPTION Sets Spectrum Analyzer graph width.C-4.

REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) Tracking Generator COMMAND :trackgen:state :trackgen:state? :trackgen:type :trackgen:type? :trackgen:scale RANGE DESCRIPTION Activates Tracking Generator signal processing.50 MHz . see Cover Page for details. 0 . Sets Tracking Generator reference level. Subject to Export Control. Sets Tracking Generator scale. :trackgen:span? Returns Tracking Generator span. Returns Tracking Generator frequency.100 MHz . C-39 . Returns Tracking Generator signal processing state.20 MHz . Returns Tracking Generator stop frequency. :trackgen:setreflvl? :trackgen:freq :trackgen:freq? :trackgen:start :trackgen:start? :trackgen:stop :trackgen:stop? :trackgen:span Returns Tracking Generator reference level.Live 1 . Returns Tracking Generator start frequency.998 MHz Returns Tracking Generator scale.Diff 0 1 2 3 4 2 dB/Div 5 dB/Div 10 dB/Div 15 dB/Div 20 dB/Div :trackgen:scale? :trackgen:setref :trackgen:setreflvl -70 dBm -60 dBm -50 dBm -40 dBm -30 dBm -20 dBm -10 dBm 0 dBm 10 dBm 2 to 1000 MHz 2 to 1000 MHz 2 to 1000 MHz 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 10 kHz 20 kHz 50 kHz 100 kHz 200 kHz 500 kHz 1 MHz 2 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz . Sets Tracking Generator frequency. Sets Tracking Generator reference. Sets Tracking Generator stop frequency. Returns Tracking Generator type.C-4.200 MHz . Sets Tracking Generator start frequency. Sets Tracking Generator span.500 MHz . Sets Tracking Generator type.

0 0% to 100% 0.SDE-AM 5 . Sets Modulator DTMF AM low level. Sets Modulator DCS Signaling State.0 to 100.0 kHz 100. Sets Modulator fgen #2 Raw Scaling.0 kHz 0. Sets Modulator type. Sets SDE FM level.0 kHz 0. Sets SDE AM level.0 to 1.P25 4 . REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) Upconverter COMMAND :upconverter:carrier_state :upconverter:carrier_state? :upconverter:dcs:am :upconverter:dcs:fm :upconverter:dcs:state :upconverter:dtmf:am:high :upconverter:dtmf:am:low :upconverter:dtmf:fm:high :upconverter:dtmf:fm:low :upconverter:ext_aud_in:gain :upconverter:ext_aud_in:state :upconverter:fgen1:am :upconverter:fgen1:fm :upconverter:fgen1:freq :upconverter:fgen1:gain :upconverter:fgen1:state :upconverter:fgen2:am :upconverter:fgen2:fm :upconverter:fgen2:freq :upconverter:fgen2:gain :upconverter:fgen2:state :upconverter:mic:am :upconverter:mic:fm :upconverter:mic:gain :upconverter:mic:select? :upconverter:mic:state :upconverter:mod_inhibit :upconverter:mod_inhibit? :upconverter:route:enable :upconverter:sde:am :upconverter:sde:fm :upconverter:sde:gain :upconverter:type RANGE DESCRIPTION Acts as a PTT.0 to 1.0 0.0 to 100. Sets Modulator fgen #2 AM level. Sets Modulator fgen #1 FM level.C-4. Sets Modulator External Audio Input State. Sets Modulator DCS FM level.0 kHz 0 to 24000 Hz 0. C-40 Subject to Export Control.AM 1 . Sets Modulator Microphone State.0 to 1.0 to 100.0 0 .0 to 1. Disables modulation for one-time calibrations.0 to 100.None 3 . Sets Modulator ON/OFF. 0% to 100% 0. Needs to be ON for normal Generator operation.0 to to to to to 100% 100% 100. see Cover Page for details.0 0% to 100% 0. Returns carrier state. Sets Modulator fgen #2 frequency. Sets Modulator fgen #1 ON/OFF.0 0% to 100% 0.Invalid :upconverter:type? Returns Modulator type.0 kHz 0% 0% 0. . Sets Modulator Microphone AM level. Sets Modulator fgen #2 FM level. Sets Modulator DCS AM level.FM 2 . Sets Modulator External Audio Input Raw Scaling. Sets SDE Gain ffff Scaling. Returns the Microphone connected. Sets Modulator Microphone State. Sets Modulator DTMF AM high level.0 0. Sets Modulator DTMF FM low level. Sets Modulator fgen #1 Raw Scaling.0 kHz 0 to 24000 Hz 0. Sets Modulator fgen #2 ON/OFF.0 kHz 1.SDE-FM 6 .0 to 100. Sets Modulator DTMF FM high level. Sets Modulator fgen #1 frequency.0 0% to 100% 0. Sets Modulator Microphone FM level. Sets Modulator fgen #1 AM level. Returns modulation inhibit state.

see Cover Page for details.RL . Sets center frequency. Returns Cable Length to Span. Returns marker delta number at x axis. Returns span.OPEN_CIRCUIT .Top . :vswr:runmode Sets Run mode.DTF .SHORT_CIRCUIT . :vswr:scale :vswr:size? :vswr:span :vswr:span? :vswr:span2cablelength? :vswr:start :vswr:start? :vswr:startsweep Sets scale for vertical. Returns marker delta number at y axis. REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) VSWR Meter COMMAND :vswr:cable:len :vswr:cablelength2span? :vswr:cable:loss :vswr:cable:velocity :vswr:cal:save :vswr:cal:recall :vswr:complete? :vswr:freq :vswr:freq? :vswr:marker:delta :vswr:marker:delta:x? :vswr:marker:delta:y? :vswr:marker:enable :vswr:marker:left :vswr:marker:lmin :vswr:marker:lpk :vswr:marker:max :vswr:marker:min :vswr:marker:pos :vswr:marker:right :vswr:marker:rpk :vswr:marker:rmin :vswr:marker:x? :vswr:marker:y? :vswr:meas:type RANGE in feet in dB [0. Moves marker to the left. Moves marker to next left min.0. Returns the progress of the sweep through the selected bandwidth.RESULT_INVALID . Returns Calculated Span to Cable Length. Returns marker number at y axis.C-4. Recalls Calibration data. Enables Marker. Returns center frequency. Sets Delta Marker.0] DESCRIPTION Estimates cable length to measure.LOSS . Returns marker number at x axis. Sets start frequency.REQUEST_RUNNING .Calibration . Moves marker to maximum. Moves marker to next right peak.SWR .INVALID_CIRCUIT . Sets cable velocity factor. Returns start frequency.RUNNING . Sets span.REQUEST_STOP . 0% to 100% 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 1 2 2 to to to to to to to to to 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 to 3 to 3 to 3 to 3 to 3 . Sets cable attenuation per 100 feet. Selects type of measurement. Moves marker to next right min.Raw .FIFTY_OHM_CIRCUIT .Bottom to 512 :vswr:meas:type? :vswr:postprocess Returns type of measurement. 1. Sets Post Process state. Moves marker to the right.STOPPED . Saves Calibration data. Moves marker to minimum. Returns SWR trace length. Sets horizontal position of current Marker. C-41 .LOAD_CIRCUIT . Moves marker to next left peak. in MHz Subject to Export Control. Starts sweep.

Returns SWR trace values by index. Stops sweep. (See :vswr:size? command. (See :vswr:size? command.) C-42 Subject to Export Control. Returns stop frequency. Sets stop frequency. :vswr:state? :vswr:stop :vswr:stop? :vswr:stopsweep :vswr:trace:count? :vswr:trace:dtf? :vswr:trace:loss? :vswr:trace:rtn_loss? :vswr:trace:size? :vswr:trace:vswr? :vswr:trace:vswr_dump? :vswr:units :vswr:val? 0 to 4294967295 0 to trace size -50 to 0 dB 0 to trace size -5 to 0 dB 0 to trace size -5 to 0 dB 2 to 512 0 to trace size SWR: 1 to 6 minus one minus one minus one minus one 0 . (See :vswr:size? command.) Returns LOSS trace values by index. Returns SWR trace values by index. Returns trace count of each trace completed then counts increments. (See :vswr:size? command.Feet 1 .) Returns Return Loss trace values by index.C-4.) Returns VSWR trace values. Returns DTF trace values by index. (See :vswr:size? command. Sets the units of measure. . see Cover Page for details.) Returns SWR trace length.Meters 0 to trace size minus one SWR: 1 to 6 Returns VSWR state. REMOTE OPERATION COMMANDS (cont) VSWR Meter (cont) COMMAND :vswr:state RANGE 0 1 2 3 4 RESULT_INVALID REQUEST_RUNNING RUNNING STOPPED REQUEST_STOP DESCRIPTION Sets VSWR state.

see Cover Page for details. INDEX-1 . Indicators and Connectors 2-58 1-2 2-90 3-1 A-3 A-4 A-1 A-2 A-5 A-6 2-1 D Date / Time Screen DCS Decode Meter Diagnostic Screen Distortion Meter Screen DTMF Decode Meter Duplex Test Screen 2-67 2-74 2-55 2-47 2-75 2-9 E Environment Equipment Capabilities and Features Capabilities Features Equipment Data 3-17 1-2 1-2 1-3 1-4 F Features Function Generator Functions. Other Recall Configuration Screen Save Configuration Screen Fuse Replacement (Procedure) 1-3 2-76 2-85 2-85 2-86 3-11 Subject to Export Control.INDEX A Abbreviations Accessories Optional Items Standard Items Advanced Vehicle Installation Testing AF Counter Screen Annunciator Setup Screen ANT-Cable Test Screen AUDIO Connector Pin-Out Table 3500 3500A Audio Function Generator Test Screen Audio Level Meter Screen B-1 xi vii 2-96 2-49 2-60 2-31 A-3 A-4 2-40 2-51 G General Information Nomenclature Cross-Reference List Scope 1-1 1-1 1-1 H Handle Replacement (Procedure) HW Config Setup Screen 3-14 2-68 I I/O Connectors 3500 3500A Icons. Screen A-1 A-2 2-6 B Battery Precautions Recharging (Procedure) Replacement (Procedure) Bumper Replacement (Procedure) 3-2 3-7 3-8 3-16 L Loading Software w/ USB Memory Device 2-112 C Calibration Screen Capabilities Cautions. Screen Warnings and Checking Unpacked Equipment Connector Pin-Out Tables AUDIO Connector Pin-Out Table 3500 3500A I/O Connectors 3500 3500A REMOTE Connector Pin-Out Table 3500 3500A Controls.

see Cover Page for details. .M Maintenance Procedures Battery Recharging Battery Replacement Bumper Replacement Fuse Replacement Handle Replacement Measuring DTF Reverse Power SWR Menu Configurations. Other DCS Decode Meter DTMF Decode Meter Function Generator Modulation Meter Screen RF Error Meter Screen RF Power Meter Screen RSSI Meter Screen Modulation Meter Screen 3-7 3-7 3-8 3-16 3-11 3-14 2-102 2-108 2-97 2-7 2-44 2-49 2-51 2-47 2-45 2-6 2-53 2-58 2-55 2-54 2-8 2-31 2-40 2-9 2-18 2-26 2-59 2-60 2-67 2-68 2-70 2-61 2-72 2-71 2-66 2-5 2-44 2-49 2-51 2-47 2-45 2-73 2-74 2-75 2-76 2-77 2-79 2-81 2-83 2-77 O Operating Instructions Operating Procedures Advanced Vehicle Installation Testing Introduction Loading Software w/ USB Memory Device Measuring DTF Measuring Reverse Power Measuring SWR Typical Vehicle Installation Test Operation Screens and Menu Configurations Meters Menu AF Counter Screen Audio Level Meter Screen Distortion Meter Screen SINAD Meter Screen Screen Icons Self Test Menu Calibration Screen Diagnostic Screen Self Test Screen System Menu ANT-Cable Test Screen Audio Function Generator Test Screen Duplex Test Screen Receiver Test Screen Transmitter Test Screen Utilities Menu Annunciator Setup Screen Date / Time Screen HW Config Setup Screen Options Screen Remote Setup Screen Unit Copy Screen USB Manager Screen Version Screen Operation Under Usual Conditions Screen Warnings and Cautions Turn-On Procedure Options Installing Oscilloscope P25 Test Scripting Spectrum Analyzer Tracking Generator Options Screen Oscilloscope Option Oscilloscope Screen Features / Functions Other Functions Recall Configuration Screen Save Configuration Screen Other Meters / Functions DCS Decode Meter DTMF Decode Meter Function Generator Modulation Meter Screen RF Error Meter Screen RF Power Meter Screen RSSI Meter Screen 2-1 2-91 2-96 2-91 2-112 2-102 2-108 2-97 2-92 2-7 2-44 2-49 2-51 2-47 2-45 2-6 2-53 2-58 2-55 2-54 2-8 2-31 2-40 2-9 2-18 2-26 2-59 2-60 2-67 2-68 2-70 2-61 2-72 2-71 2-66 2-88 2-90 2-88 4-2 4-15 4-31 4-33 4-3 4-23 2-70 4-15 4-15 4-16 2-85 2-85 2-86 2-73 2-74 2-75 2-76 2-77 2-79 2-81 2-83 N Nomenclature Cross-Reference List 1-1 INDEX-2 Subject to Export Control. Operation Screens and Meters Menu AF Counter Screen Audio Level Meter Screen Distortion Meter Screen SINAD Meter Screen Screen Icons Self Test Menu Calibration Screen Diagnostic Screen Self Test Screen System Menu ANT-Cable Test Screen Audio Function Generator Test Screen Duplex Test Screen Receiver Test Screen Transmitter Test Screen Utilities Menu Annunciator Setup Screen Date / Time Screen HW Config Setup Screen Options Screen Remote Setup Screen Unit Copy Screen USB Manager Screen Version Screen Menu / Screen Hierarchy Meters Menu AF Counter Screen Audio Level Meter Screen Distortion Meter Screen SINAD Meter Screen Meters / Functions.

P P25 Test Option P25 Mini-Meter Features / Functions Packaging Preliminary Servicing and Adjustment of Equipment Preparation for Storage or Shipment Packaging Environment Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services General Preventive Maintenance Procedures Routine Checks Schedule of Checks Tools. Materials and Equipment Principles of Operation 3500 3500A 4-31 4-31 4-32 3-17 3-2 3-17 3-17 3-17 2-87 2-87 2-87 2-87 2-87 2-87 1-15 1-16 S Schedule of Checks Scope Screen Icons Screen / Menu Hierarchy Screens and Menu Configurations. see Cover Page for details. 3-1 3-2 xi 3-1 3-1 3-1 vii 2-45 4-3 4-4 4-5 3-3 2-8 2-31 2-40 2-9 2-18 2-26 R Recall Configuration Screen Receiver Test Screen REMOTE Connector Pin-Out Table 3500 3500A Remote Operation Commands AF Counter AGC Audio Level Meter Calibration DCS Decode Demod Deviation Meter / Modulation Meter Distortion Meter External Audio Input External Audio Output Frequency Find Function Generator Normalize Oscilloscope Options P25 Receiver RF Error Meter RF Generator RF Power Meter RSSI Meter Screens Scripting Setup Signaling Sinad Meter Speaker Spectrum Analyzer Tracking Generator Upconverter VSWR Meter Configuration Ethernet RS-232 Connection Remote Setup Screen RF Error Meter Screen RF Power Meter Screen RSSI Meter Screen 2-85 2-18 A-5 A-6 C-1 C-9 C-10 C-11 C-12 C-13 C-14 C-15 C-16 C-17 C-18 C-18 C-18 C-19 C-20 C-21 C-22 C-24 C-24 C-25 C-26 C-28 C-29 C-30 C-32 C-34 C-35 C-36 C-37 C-39 C-40 C-41 C-2 C-6 C-1 2-61 2-79 2-81 2-83 Subject to Export Control. INDEX-3 . Operation Meters Menu AF Counter Screen Audio Level Meter Screen Distortion Meter Screen SINAD Meter Screen Screen Icons Self Test Menu Calibration Screen Diagnostic Screen Self Test Screen System Menu ANT-Cable Test Screen Audio Function Generator Test Screen Duplex Test Screen Receiver Test Screen Transmitter Test Screen Utilities Menu Annunciator Setup Screen Date / Time Screen HW Config Setup Screen Options Screen Remote Setup Screen Unit Copy Screen USB Manager Screen Version Screen Screen Warnings and Cautions Scripting Option General Scripting Commands Scripting Flowcharts Audio Receiver Transmitter Scripts Screen Features / Functions Transfer Scripts to the 3500 / 3500A Self Test Menu Calibration Screen Diagnostic Screen Self Test Screen Self Test Screen Service Upon Receipt Preliminary Servicing and Adjustment Optional Items Service Upon Receipt of Material Checking Unpacked Equipment Unpacking Standard Items SINAD Meter Screen Spectrum Analyzer Option Spectrum Analyzer Screen Features / Functions Symptom Index (Troubleshooting) System Menu ANT-Cable Test Screen Audio Function Generator Test Screen Duplex Test Screen Receiver Test Screen Transmitter Test Screen 2-87 1-1 2-6 2-5 2-5 2-44 2-49 2-51 2-47 2-45 2-6 2-53 2-58 2-55 2-54 2-8 2-31 2-40 2-9 2-18 2-26 2-59 2-60 2-67 2-68 2-70 2-61 2-72 2-71 2-66 2-90 4-33 4-38 4-39 4-39 4-41 4-42 4-33 4-34 4-35 2-53 2-58 2-55 2-54 2-54 vi.

Materials and Equipment Required Tracking Generator Option Tracking Generator Screen Features / Functions Transmitter Test Screen Troubleshooting Symptom Index Troubleshooting Table Turn-On Procedure Typical Vehicle Installation Test 2-87 4-23 4-23 4-24 2-26 3-3 3-3 3-4 2-88 2-92 U Unpacking USB Manager Screen Utilities Menu Annunciator Setup Screen Date / Time Screen HW Config Setup Screen Options Screen Remote Setup Screen USB Manager Screen Version Screen 3-1 2-71 2-59 2-60 2-67 2-68 2-70 2-61 2-71 2-66 V Vehicle Installation Test Advanced Vehicle Installation Testing Typical Vehicle Installation Test Version Screen 2-96 2-92 2-66 W Warnings and Cautions. see Cover Page for details. Screen 2-90 INDEX-4 Subject to Export Control.T Tools. .

We reserve the right to make design changes without notice. Violations of these regulations are punishable by fine.S. It cannot be transferred to any foreign third party without the specific prior approval of the U. or both. none of which shall form part of any contract. imprisonment. Our passion for performance is defined by three attributes represented by these three icons: solution-minded. customer-focused. CHINA / Beijing CHINA / Shanghai FINLAND FRANCE GERMANY HONG KONG INDIA JAPAN KOREA SCANDINAVIA *SINGAPORE SPAIN UK / Cambridge *UK / Stevenage *USA Tel: [+86] (10) 6539 1166 Tel: [+86] (21) 5109 5128 Tel: [+358] (9) 2709 5541 Tel: [+33] 1 60 79 96 00 Tel: [+49] 8131 2926-0 Tel: [+852] 2832 7988 Tel: [+91] (0) 80 4115 4501 Tel: [+81] 3 3500 5591 Tel: [+82] (2) 3424 2719 Tel: [+45] 9614 0045 Tel: [+65] 6873 0991 Tel: [+34] (91) 640 11 34 Tel: [+44] (0) 1763 262277 Tel: [+44] (0) 1438 742200 Freephone: 0800 282388 Tel: [+1] (316) 522 4981 Toll Free: 800 835 2352 * Indicates Regional Service Center Fax: [+86] (10) 6539 1778 Fax: [+86] (21) 6457 7668 Fax: [+358] (9) 804 2441 Fax: [+33] 1 60 77 69 22 Fax: [+49] 8131 2926-130 Fax: [+852] 2834 5364 Fax: [+91] (0) 80 4115 4502 Fax: [+81] 3 3500 5592 Fax: [+82] (2) 3424 8620 Fax: [+45] 9614 0047 Fax: [+65] 6873 0992 Fax: [+34] (91) 640 06 40 Fax: [+44] (0) 1763 285353 Fax: [+44] (0) 1438 727601 Fax: [+1] (316) 522 1360 EXPORT CONTROL WARNING: This document contains controlled technology or technical data under the jurisdiction of the Export Administration Regulations (EAR). Bureau of Industry and Security (BIS). 15 CFR 730-774. performance and suitability. . Department of Commerce. performance-driven.As we are always seeking to improve our products. the information in this document gives only a general indication of the product capacity.